WO2020168723A1 - 参考信号接收与发送方法、设备及系统 - Google Patents

参考信号接收与发送方法、设备及系统 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2020168723A1
WO2020168723A1 PCT/CN2019/109526 CN2019109526W WO2020168723A1 WO 2020168723 A1 WO2020168723 A1 WO 2020168723A1 CN 2019109526 W CN2019109526 W CN 2019109526W WO 2020168723 A1 WO2020168723 A1 WO 2020168723A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
period
duration
paging opportunity
cycle
reference signal
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Ceased
Application number
PCT/CN2019/109526
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
苏俞婉
金哲
米翔
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Original Assignee
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Huawei Technologies Co Ltd filed Critical Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Priority to JP2021548590A priority Critical patent/JP7220799B2/ja
Priority to CN201980091871.XA priority patent/CN113455067B/zh
Priority to EP19916044.1A priority patent/EP3920612B1/en
Priority to BR112021016401-4A priority patent/BR112021016401A2/pt
Publication of WO2020168723A1 publication Critical patent/WO2020168723A1/zh
Priority to US17/404,193 priority patent/US11895618B2/en
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Ceased legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W68/00—User notification, e.g. alerting and paging, for incoming communication, change of service or the like
    • H04W68/005—Transmission of information for alerting of incoming communication
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W68/00—User notification, e.g. alerting and paging, for incoming communication, change of service or the like
    • H04W68/02—Arrangements for increasing efficiency of notification or paging channel
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L1/00—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
    • H04L1/004—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using forward error control
    • H04L1/0045—Arrangements at the receiver end
    • H04L1/0047—Decoding adapted to other signal detection operation
    • H04L1/005—Iterative decoding, including iteration between signal detection and decoding operation
    • H04L1/0051—Stopping criteria
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0078—Timing of allocation
    • H04L5/0082—Timing of allocation at predetermined intervals
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0091—Signalling for the administration of the divided path, e.g. signalling of configuration information
    • H04L5/0092—Indication of how the channel is divided
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00—Connection management
    • H04W76/20—Manipulation of established connections
    • H04W76/28—Discontinuous transmission [DTX]; Discontinuous reception [DRX]
    • Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02—TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02D—CLIMATE CHANGE MITIGATION TECHNOLOGIES IN INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES [ICT], I.E. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES AIMING AT THE REDUCTION OF THEIR OWN ENERGY USE
    • Y02D30/00—Reducing energy consumption in communication networks
    • Y02D30/70—Reducing energy consumption in communication networks in wireless communication networks

Definitions

  • This application relates to the field of communications, and in particular to methods, devices and systems for receiving and transmitting reference signals.
  • the terminal device has two states. One is the connected state, which means that the terminal device has established a connection with the network device and can communicate directly; the other is the idle state or sleep state, which means that the terminal device cannot Communicate directly with network equipment.
  • the terminal device can enter the idle state to reduce power consumption.
  • a network device wants to send service data to a terminal device or needs a terminal device to report some service data, it can notify the terminal device through the paging mechanism, and the idle terminal device will wake up periodically to monitor the physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) ), detecting whether there is a paging scheduling message in the PDCCH. If there is a paging scheduling message and it is a paging scheduling for itself, the idle state terminal device switches to the connected state to send or receive service data. The position where the terminal device wakes up is called a paging opportunity (PO).
  • PDCCH physical downlink control channel
  • network devices can send some narrowband reference signals (NRS) to terminal devices on non-anchor carriers.
  • NRS narrowband reference signals
  • the NRS sent by the network device to the terminal device may be an NRS associated with a subset of the PO.
  • a subset of POs may be composed of, for example, the m-th PO in every N POs, where m is a positive integer less than or equal to N, and N is a positive integer.
  • this solution may have the problem of being unfair to terminal devices monitoring different POs.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide methods, devices, and systems for receiving and transmitting reference signals, which can solve the problem of unfairness of existing solutions to terminal devices that monitor different POs.
  • a method for sending a reference signal and a corresponding communication device are provided.
  • This solution is applied to multiple periods whose period length is a first period length, the multiple periods include a first period and a second period, the first period and the second period each include M first periods, and the first period
  • the above includes N paging opportunities.
  • the position distribution of paging opportunities in the first period is the same as the position distribution of paging opportunities in the second period.
  • M is a positive integer and N is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • the solution includes: network equipment determination The first target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first period, wherein the relative position of the first target paging opportunity in the first period and the relative position of the second target paging opportunity in the second period In different locations, the second target paging opportunity is the target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the second period, and m is any positive integer less than or equal to M; the network device determines the first target paging opportunity according to the first target paging opportunity The time domain resource at the m-th first duration of a cycle, where the time domain resource is the time domain resource in the time-frequency resource used to transmit the reference signal; the network device sends the reference to the terminal device on the time-frequency resource signal.
  • the reference signal is also sent when there is no paging scheduling message in the NPDCCH, and the reference signal is associated with the first target in the mth first duration of the first period
  • the relative position of the paging opportunity in the first period is different from that of the second target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the second period associated with the reference signal in the second period. From the perspective of the terminal device See, because each discontinuous reception cycle monitors a paging opportunity, the location of the paging opportunity monitored by different terminal devices may be different.
  • the paging opportunities monitored by different terminal devices when the paging opportunities monitored by different terminal devices are different, there will In the continuous reception period, the paging opportunities monitored by different terminal devices have the opportunity to associate the reference signal in one of the discontinuous reception periods, while the paging opportunities monitored by some terminal devices have no associated reference signal. It is more fair for each terminal device.
  • the solution further includes: the network device determines that the first duration includes N paging opportunities, the value of N is related to paging configuration parameters, and the paging configuration parameters include paging opportunities in the discontinuous reception period At least one of the number or the length of the discontinuous reception period.
  • the network device determining the first target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first period includes: the network device determining a first offset, and the first offset is used to indicate The position of the first target paging opportunity among the N paging opportunities in the m-th first duration of the first cycle; the network device determines the m-th first duration of the first cycle according to the first offset The first target paging opportunity. Based on this solution, the network device can determine the first target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first cycle.
  • the network device determines the first target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first cycle according to the first offset, including: if the first target paging opportunity includes multiple For the target paging opportunity, the network device determines the first paging opportunity in the first target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first cycle according to the first offset. Based on this solution, based on this solution, when there are multiple first target paging opportunities, the network device can determine the first paging opportunity among the first target paging opportunities in the m-th first duration of the first cycle, and then The network device can learn all paging opportunities in the first target paging opportunity.
  • the solution further includes: the network device sends an N-bit bitmap to the terminal device, and each bit in the bitmap is used to indicate each pager in the N paging opportunities. Whether to associate the reference signal; the network device determines the first target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first cycle according to the first offset, including: the network device determines the first target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration according to the bitmap and the first offset The setting determines the first target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first cycle. Based on this solution, the network device can determine the first target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first cycle.
  • the network device determines the first target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first cycle according to the first offset, including: the network device determines the m-th target paging opportunity in the first cycle
  • the index of the paging opportunity in one period (it can be characterized by PO_Index), the index of the paging opportunity in the m-th first period of the first period is that the paging opportunity in the m-th first period of the first period is in the first period Index within a period or reference signal period.
  • the network device determines the index of the first target paging opportunity (PO_Index1) in the m-th first period of the first period from the index of the paging opportunity in the m-th first period of the first period according to the first offset. ; The network device determines the first target paging opportunity according to the index of the first target paging opportunity. Based on this solution, the network device can determine the first target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first cycle.
  • PO_Index1 the index of the first target paging opportunity
  • the network device determining the first target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first period may specifically include: the network device determining the second parameter value according to R, PO_Index, and N, and the second The parameter value is used to characterize whether the paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first cycle is the first target paging opportunity, where N is the number of paging opportunities in the m-th first duration of the first cycle, PO_Index Is the index of the paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first cycle, and PO_Index is determined according to the frame number of the paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first cycle or the frame number at the beginning of the first cycle; R is determined according to the superframe number and frame number where the paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first period is located, or the frame number at the beginning of the first period and the superframe number where the first period is located. Based on this solution, the network device can determine the first target
  • a method for receiving a reference signal and a corresponding communication device are provided.
  • the solution is applied to a plurality of periods whose period length is a first period length, and the plurality of periods includes a first period and a second period.
  • Both the first period and the second period include M first durations, the first duration includes N paging opportunities, the location distribution of paging opportunities in the first period is the same as the location distribution of paging opportunities in the second period, M Is a positive integer, and N is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • the solution includes: the terminal device determines the first target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first period, where the first target paging opportunity is in the first The relative position in the period is different from the relative position of the second target paging opportunity in the second period.
  • the second target paging opportunity is the target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the second period, and m is less than or Any positive integer equal to M;
  • the terminal device determines the time domain resource on the m-th first duration of the first cycle according to the first target paging opportunity, and the time domain resource is among the time-frequency resources used to transmit the reference signal The time domain resource; the terminal device receives the reference signal from the network device on the time-frequency resource.
  • the solution further includes: the terminal device determines that the first duration includes N paging opportunities, the value of N is related to paging configuration parameters, and the paging configuration parameters include paging opportunities in the discontinuous reception period At least one of the number or the length of the discontinuous reception period.
  • the terminal device determining the first target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first period includes: the terminal device determining a first offset, and the first offset is used to indicate The position of the first target paging opportunity among the N paging opportunities in the m-th first duration of the first period; the terminal device determines the m-th first duration of the first period according to the first offset The first target paging opportunity.
  • the terminal device determines the first target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first cycle according to the first offset, including: if the first target paging opportunity includes multiple For the target paging opportunity, the terminal device determines the first paging opportunity in the first target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first period according to the first offset.
  • the solution further includes: the terminal device receives an N-bit bitmap from the network device, and each bit in the bitmap is used to indicate each of the N paging opportunities. Whether the paging opportunity is associated with the reference signal; the terminal device determines the first target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first cycle according to the first offset, including: the terminal device according to the bitmap and the first The offset determines the first target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first cycle.
  • the terminal device determines the first target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first cycle according to the first offset, including: the terminal device determines the m-th target paging opportunity in the first cycle
  • the index of the paging opportunity in one period (it can be characterized by PO_Index), the index of the paging opportunity in the m-th first period of the first period is that the paging opportunity in the m-th first period of the first period is in the first period Index within a period or reference signal period.
  • the terminal device determines the index (PO_Index1) of the first target paging opportunity in the m-th first period of the first period from the index of the paging opportunity in the m-th first period of the first period according to the first offset. ; The terminal device determines the first target paging opportunity according to the index of the first target paging opportunity. Based on this solution, the terminal device can determine the first target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first cycle.
  • the terminal device determining the first target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first period may specifically include: the terminal device determining the second parameter value according to R, PO_Index, and N, and the second The parameter value is used to characterize whether the paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first cycle is the first target paging opportunity, where N is the number of paging opportunities in the m-th first duration of the first cycle, PO_Index Is the index of the paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first cycle, and PO_Index is determined according to the frame number of the paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first cycle or the frame number at the beginning of the first cycle; R is determined according to the superframe number and frame number where the paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first period is located, or the frame number at the beginning of the first period and the superframe number where the first period is located. Based on this solution, the terminal device can determine the first target paging opportunity in the
  • the first offset is determined according to the first parameter value, the first period length, and the N; wherein, the first parameter value is Determined according to one or more of the frame number at the beginning of the first cycle or the superframe number where the first cycle is located; or, the first parameter value is determined according to the frame number at the beginning of the first cycle, or the One or more of the superframe numbers where the first period is located and the period length of the reference signal are determined.
  • first offset (first parameter value/first cycle length) mod(N), where mod represents Take the remainder.
  • the first offset is determined according to the first parameter value and the N; wherein, the first parameter value is determined according to the first period Is determined by one or more of the frame number or the superframe number in which the first cycle is located, and the cycle length of the reference signal and the first cycle length.
  • first offset (first parameter value) mod(N), where mod represents the remainder.
  • the first offset is determined according to the first parameter value and the N, including: the first offset is determined according to the first parameter value, the N, and a pseudo-random sequence.
  • the sequence is a pseudo-random sequence related to the first parameter value, and f (pseudo-random sequence) is a function determined by the pseudo-random sequence.
  • the number of the superframe in which a period is located, floor means rounding down, and T means the first period.
  • floor means rounding down
  • SFN 1 means the frame number of the paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first period or the frame number at the beginning of the first period
  • T means the first period
  • A, B, C is an integer
  • mod represents the remainder
  • nB represents the paging density
  • i_s represents the index of the subframe number of the paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first cycle.
  • the first period and the second period are both discontinuous reception periods.
  • a communication device for implementing the above-mentioned various methods.
  • the communication device may be the terminal device in the second aspect described above, the eleventh aspect described below, or the thirteenth aspect described below, or a device including the terminal device described above; or, the communication device may be the first aspect described above, the following The network equipment in the tenth aspect or the following twelfth aspect, or a device containing the aforementioned network equipment.
  • the communication device includes a module, unit, or means corresponding to the foregoing method, and the module, unit, or means can be implemented by hardware, software, or hardware execution of corresponding software.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more modules or units corresponding to the above-mentioned functions.
  • a communication device including: a processor and a memory; the memory is used to store computer instructions, and when the processor executes the instructions, the communication device executes the method described in any of the above aspects.
  • the communication device may be the terminal device in the second aspect described above, the eleventh aspect described below, or the thirteenth aspect described below, or a device including the terminal device described above; or, the communication device may be the first aspect described above, the following The network equipment in the tenth aspect or the following twelfth aspect, or a device containing the aforementioned network equipment.
  • a communication device including: a processor; the processor is configured to couple with a memory, and after reading an instruction in the memory, execute the method according to any of the foregoing aspects according to the instruction.
  • the communication device may be the terminal device in the second aspect described above, the eleventh aspect described below, or the thirteenth aspect described below, or a device including the terminal device described above; or, the communication device may be the first aspect described above, the following The network equipment in the tenth aspect or the following twelfth aspect, or a device containing the aforementioned network equipment.
  • a computer-readable storage medium stores instructions that, when run on a computer, enable the computer to execute the method described in any of the above or the following aspects.
  • a computer program product containing instructions which when run on a computer, enables the computer to execute the method described in any of the above or the following aspects.
  • a communication device for example, the communication device may be a chip or a chip system
  • the communication device includes a processor for implementing the functions involved in any of the above or the following aspects.
  • the communication device further includes a memory for storing necessary program instructions and data.
  • the communication device is a chip system, it may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
  • the technical effect brought by any one of the third aspect to the eighth aspect can be referred to the above-mentioned first aspect or second aspect, or the following tenth aspect to the thirteenth aspect brought about by different design methods The technical effect of, will not be repeated here.
  • a communication system includes the terminal device described in the foregoing aspect and the network device described in the foregoing aspect; or, the communication system includes the terminal device described in the following aspect and the terminal device described in the following aspect. Network equipment.
  • a method for sending a reference signal and a corresponding communication device including: a network device sends first indication information to a terminal device, the first indication information is used to indicate whether there is a first reference signal on a first resource ; If the first indication information indicates that there is no first reference signal on the first resource, the network device sends second indication information to the terminal device, the second indication information is used to indicate whether there is a second reference signal on the first resource.
  • the first reference signal here may be a narrowband reference signal NRS, for example
  • the second reference signal here may be a cell reference signal CRS, for example.
  • the network device when the network device needs to transmit the first reference signal and the second reference signal at the same time, since the first reference signal is configured, it must be The second reference signal will be configured so that the two reference signals can be indicated at the same time through the indication information used to indicate the first reference signal, that is, the network device can indicate that there is a first reference on the first resource through the first indication information Signal and a second reference signal; or, the network device may indicate that there is no first reference on the first resource through the first indication information used to indicate the first reference signal and the second indication information used to indicate the second reference signal Signal and no second reference signal, or only second reference signal on the first resource.
  • the network device can only send CRS on the first resource, which can avoid the network device in the prior art. Not only need to send additional CRS on some resources, but also need to send additional NRS on these resources, which causes waste of power consumption of network equipment, affects LTE resource scheduling, and is not conducive to network equipment power shutdown for symbol-level resources, etc.
  • Various problems are possible.
  • a method for receiving a reference signal and a corresponding communication device including: a terminal device receives first indication information from a network device, and the first indication information is used to indicate whether there is a first resource on the first resource. Reference signal; if the first indication information indicates that there is no first reference signal on the first resource, the terminal device receives second indication information from the network device, and the second indication information is used to indicate whether there is a second reference signal on the first resource.
  • the first reference signal here may be, for example, a narrowband reference signal
  • the second reference signal here may be, for example, a cell reference signal.
  • a method for sending a reference signal and a corresponding communication device including: a network device sends first indication information to a terminal device, where the first indication information is used to indicate whether there is a reference signal on a first resource; If the first indication information indicates that there is a reference signal on the first resource, the network device sends second indication information to the terminal device, where the second indication information is used to indicate whether there is a first reference signal on the first resource.
  • the first reference signal here may be, for example, a narrowband reference signal NRS.
  • the network device when the network device does not need to send a reference signal, it can indicate that there is no reference signal on the first resource through the first indication information; or, When the network device needs to send the first reference signal and the second reference signal at the same time, since the first reference signal is configured, the second reference signal must be configured, so that the indication information for indicating the first reference signal can be passed To indicate the two reference signals at the same time, that is, the network device can indicate that the first reference signal and the second reference signal exist on the first resource through the first indication information and the second indication information; or, the network device does not need to When the first reference signal is sent and the second reference signal needs to be sent, if the second indication information indicates that the first reference signal is not available on the first resource, it is equivalent to indicating that there is only the second reference signal on the first resource, That is, the first indication information and the second indication information may be used to indicate that there is only the second reference signal on the first resource.
  • the network device can only send CRS on the first resource, which can avoid the network device in the prior art. Not only need to send additional CRS on some resources, but also need to send additional NRS on these resources, which causes waste of power consumption of network equipment, affects LTE resource scheduling, and is not conducive to network equipment power shutdown for symbol-level resources, etc.
  • Various problems are possible.
  • a method for receiving a reference signal and a corresponding communication device including: a terminal device receives first indication information from a network device, the first indication information is used to indicate whether there is a reference signal on the first resource ; If the first indication information indicates that there is a reference signal on the first resource, the terminal device receives second indication information from the network device, and the second indication information is used to indicate whether there is a first reference signal on the first resource.
  • the first reference signal here may be, for example, a narrowband reference signal NRS.
  • the first indication information and the second indication information are carrier-level indication information.
  • the first indication information and the second indication information are cell-level indication information.
  • the first indication information is cell-level indication information
  • the second indication information is carrier-level indication information
  • the first indication information is carrier-level indication information
  • the second indication information is cell-level indication information
  • Figure 1a is a schematic diagram of detection in the NPDCCH search space in the existing NB-IOT system
  • Figure 1b is a schematic diagram of the PO position in the DRX cycle configured on the existing network equipment
  • Fig. 1c is a schematic diagram of PO positions in a DRX cycle configured on network devices corresponding to different nBs in the NB-IOT system in the prior art;
  • Figure 1d is a schematic diagram of the relationship between an existing super frame and a system frame
  • Figure 1e is a schematic diagram of a subset of existing POs consisting of the first PO in every N POs;
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication system provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device and a network device provided by an embodiment of the application
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of another structure of a terminal device provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 5 is a reference signal receiving and sending method provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram 1 of the distribution of target paging opportunities provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 7 is a second schematic diagram of the distribution of target paging opportunities provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 8 is a third schematic diagram of the distribution of target paging opportunities provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 9 is a fourth schematic diagram of the distribution of target paging opportunities provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 10 is a fifth schematic diagram of the distribution of target paging opportunities provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 11 is a sixth schematic diagram of the distribution of target paging opportunities provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 12 is a seventh schematic diagram of the distribution of target paging opportunities provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 13 is an eighth schematic diagram of the distribution of target paging opportunities provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of another structure of a terminal device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • 15 is a schematic diagram of another structure of a network device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 16 is another reference signal receiving and sending method provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 17 is another reference signal receiving and sending method provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • the network device informs the terminal device whether it needs to enter the connected state for information exchange through the paging mechanism. In this case, the terminal device must monitor the PDCCH to complete the subsequent response. However, if the terminal device always monitors the PDCCH in the idle state, it will cause a great waste of power consumption of the terminal device.
  • the discontinuous reception cycle (DRX) working mechanism in the idle state is fixed, and a fixed DRX cycle is adopted. Considering the reduction of power consumption, the network equipment and the terminal equipment negotiate, and the terminal equipment only has a PO on the DRX cycle.
  • the PDCCH is detected in the form of blind detection in the PDCCH search space where the subframe (which may also be referred to as the PO position below) is the starting subframe.
  • the PDCCH search space refers to the set of candidate positions that may appear in the target PDCCH.
  • the PO position indicates the starting position of the terminal device to monitor the PDCCH, thereby determining the starting position of a PDCCH search space, and then according to the PDCCH search space Blind detection of PDCCH at the starting position.
  • a square can be regarded as a candidate.
  • the PDCCH in the embodiment of this application can be a narrowband PDCCH (narrowband, NPDCCH) in the narrowband internet of things (NB-IoT), or it can be another PDCCH, which is not used in this embodiment of the application.
  • NPDCCH narrowband
  • NB-IoT narrowband internet of things
  • Specific restrictions for example, as shown in Figure 1a, in the NB-IOT system, there are at most eight candidate positions in the NPDCCH search space, which are respectively recorded as candidate0, candidate1, candidate2,..., candidate7.
  • the candidate position in the embodiment of the present application occupies h subframes, h is the number of repetitions of the NPDCCH at the candidate position, and h is a positive integer, which will be explained here in a unified manner, and will not be repeated below.
  • the terminal device blindly detects different candidates in the NPDCCH search space with the subframe corresponding to the PO as the starting subframe, until the detection is successful. If none is successful, in the next DRX cycle, the terminal device continues to monitor the NPDCCH in the NPDCCH search space starting with the subframe corresponding to the PO, and so on.
  • Rmax in FIG. 1a represents the length of the NPDCCH search space with the subframe corresponding to PO as the starting subframe, and can also be understood as the maximum number of repetitions of the NPDCCH, which will be explained here in a unified manner, and will not be repeated below.
  • the DRX cycle in the embodiment of the present application may be pre-configured on the terminal device, or may be configured by the network device to the terminal device through a system message, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the DRX cycle can also be regarded as a cycle in which the terminal device in the idle state wakes up regularly, which is described here in a unified manner, and will not be repeated here.
  • FIG. 1b it is a schematic diagram of the PO position in the DRX cycle configured on the network device. It can be seen from Figure 1b that for network devices, multiple POs can be configured in one DRX cycle. For any one of the multiple terminal devices communicating with the network device, the terminal device wakes up only at one PO position in the DRX cycle. Therefore, if DRX is configured, the terminal device needs to accurately calculate when the terminal device needs to wake up during the DRX cycle to monitor possible paging. The following is the way to determine the PO position where the terminal device wakes up:
  • the PO position is determined by the system frame number (SFN) and the subframe number together, that is, the PO position can be identified by the SFN and subframe number, that is, the start of the NPDCCH search space where the paging scheduling message should appear position.
  • the SFN identifies the system frame position where the start position of the NPDCCH search space where the paging scheduling message should appear
  • the subframe number identifies the subframe position where the start position of the NPDCCH search space where the paging scheduling message should appear in the system frame.
  • a system frame includes 10 sub-frames, such as sub-frame 0, sub-frame 1, sub-frame 2, sub-frame 3, ..., sub-frame 8, and sub-frame 9, which are explained here in a unified manner and will not be repeated in the following.
  • the terminal device may determine the SFN and subframe number corresponding to the PO according to the paging configuration parameters sent by the network device. For example, an SFN that satisfies the following formula (a) can be used as the SFN corresponding to a PO:
  • the number of internal PO the value range is ⁇ 4T, 2T, T, T/2, T/4, T/8, T/16, T/32, T/64, T/128, T/256, T /512, T/1024 ⁇ ; the value of UEID is equal to (international mobile subscriber identity (IMSI) mod 4096), where the IMSI of each terminal device is unique.
  • IMSI international mobile subscriber identity
  • subframe number corresponding to a PO can be determined by the following formula (b):
  • the terminal equipment can uniquely determine an SFN within a DRX cycle according to the above formula (a); the terminal equipment according to the above Formula (b) can uniquely determine a subframe number on a system frame, and based on the system frame number and subframe number, the terminal device can uniquely determine a PO position where the terminal device wakes up within a DRX cycle.
  • the network device can also uniquely determine a PO in a DRX cycle when the terminal device wakes up according to the above formula (a) and formula (b) The location is not repeated here.
  • both the terminal equipment and the network equipment can determine all the PO positions configured by the network equipment in a DRX cycle through the above-mentioned T, nB, and UEID parameters.
  • T time domain resource of this one PO is subframe 9.
  • the time domain resources are shown as an example of subframe 9 of the second system frame and subframe 9 of the fourth system frame for description.
  • the time domain resource is the subframe 9 of the second system frame shown as an example for description. And so on.
  • Anchor carrier refers to the carrier of narrowband primary synchronization signal (NPSS), narrowband secondary synchronization signal (NSSS), narrowband physical broadcast channel (narrowband physical broadcast channel, NPBCH), NPDCCH and narrowband physical downlink sharing Channel (narrowband physical downlink shared channel, NPDSCH) carrier.
  • a non-anchor carrier refers to a carrier that only carries NPDCCH and NPDSCH, but does not carry NPSS, NSSS, and NPBCH.
  • the terminal device when the terminal device calculates the PO position through the above formula (a) and formula (b), the terminal device does not know that the subframe corresponding to the PO is the starting subframe in the NPDCCH search space Whether there is a paging scheduling message, so the terminal device needs to blindly check the NPDCCH.
  • the network device When there is a paging scheduling message in the NPDCCH search space with the subframe corresponding to the PO as the starting subframe, the network device will send the NRS at the candidate position where the terminal device can detect the paging scheduling message, and when the paging is detected The NRS is transmitted at the candidate position of the call scheduling message and on the first 10 subframes of the first subframe of the candidate position and 4 subframes of the last subframe of the candidate position. When there is no paging scheduling message in the NPDCCH search space with the subframe corresponding to the PO as the starting subframe, the network device will not send the NRS at these positions.
  • terminal equipment with good channel conditions refers to terminal equipment with relatively good indicators, such as: reference signal received power (RSRP) is better, which will be explained here in a unified manner and will not be described below. Repeat.
  • RSRP reference signal received power
  • the Gold sequence is a pseudo-random sequence.
  • the method for generating the Gold sequence will be described below.
  • the length of Gold is denoted as M PN , that is, the value range of n is: 0, 1, ... M PN -1, x 1 (n+N C ), x 2 (n+N C ) are generated c
  • the two sequences of (n), N C 1600, mod() represents the remainder.
  • x 2 (n+31) (x 2 (n+3)+x 2 (n+2)+x 2 (n+1)+x 2 (n))mod 2;
  • the value of the initialization seed of the sequence x 2 (n+N C ) is related to specific applications.
  • the sequence x 2 (n +N C ) has an initial seed of 35.
  • C init 35 can get the sequence x 2 (n+N C ).
  • the super frame (hyper system frame number, H-SFN):
  • the time unit for synchronization between terminal equipment and network equipment is a system frame number (SFN).
  • SFN system frame number
  • NB-IoT narrowband internet of things
  • 10.24s cannot meet the needs of the paging cycle. At this time, the concept of superframe H-SFN is introduced.
  • one H-SFN corresponds to 1024 SFNs, that is, one superframe is equal to 10.24s, and the value range of H-SFN is 0-1023, that is, the maximum period of H-SFN is 1024 H-SFN, corresponding to 2.9127 Hour.
  • At least one item (a) refers to any combination of these items, including any combination of a single item (a) or plural items (a).
  • at least one item (a) of a, b, or c can mean: a, b, c, ab, ac, bc, or abc, where a, b, and c can be single or multiple .
  • words such as “first” and “second” are used to distinguish the same items or similar items with substantially the same function and effect.
  • words such as “first” and “second” do not limit the quantity and order of execution, and words such as “first” and “second” do not limit the difference.
  • words such as “exemplary” or “for example” are used as examples, illustrations, or illustrations. Any embodiment or design solution described as “exemplary” or “for example” in the embodiments of the present application should not be construed as being more preferable or advantageous than other embodiments or design solutions.
  • words such as “exemplary” or “for example” are used to present related concepts in a specific manner to facilitate understanding.
  • the embodiments of this application can be applied to LTE systems, such as NB-IoT systems; and can also be applied to other wireless communication systems, such as Global System for Mobile Communication (GSM), Universal Mobile Telecommunications System, UMTS), Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) systems, Wideband Code Division Multiple Access (WCDMA), and future-oriented new network equipment systems, etc., this application embodiment
  • GSM Global System for Mobile Communication
  • UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunications System
  • CDMA Code Division Multiple Access
  • WCDMA Wideband Code Division Multiple Access
  • future-oriented new network equipment systems etc.
  • this application embodiment There is no specific limitation. Among them, the above-mentioned communication system to which this application is applied is only an example, and the communication system to which this application is applied is not limited to this, and it is explained here in a unified manner, and will not be repeated hereafter.
  • the term “system” can be replaced with "network”.
  • the network equipment may send some NRSs to the terminal equipment on a non-anchor carrier. Considering that too many NRSs will increase the overhead of the NRS, the NRS sent by the network device to the terminal device may be an NRS associated with a subset of the PO. As shown in Figure 1e, in each discontinuous reception (DRX) cycle, multiple groups of N POs may be included. Taking any group of N POs as an example, assume that a subset of POs consists of N POs.
  • FIG. 1e is only an exemplary illustration by taking one PO associated with one NRS subframe as an example. Of course, there may be multiple NRS subframes associated with one PO, which is not specifically limited here.
  • the terminal device such as terminal device 1 or terminal device 2 that monitors each of the N POs uses the NRS subframe associated with the first PO to estimate the signal to interference plus noise for early termination of the NPDCCH. Ratio, SINR).
  • the terminal devices (such as terminal device 1 or terminal device 2) that monitor each PO of the N POs pass the first
  • the NRS subframe associated with the PO is estimated to terminate the SINR of the NPDCCH early.
  • this solution has the problem of being unfair to terminal devices that monitor different POs.
  • the terminal device 2 in each DRX cycle, since the NRS subframe is closer to the position of the PO monitored by the terminal device 1 and farther from the position of the PO monitored by the terminal device 2, the terminal device 2 always needs to be better than the terminal device 2.
  • the device 1 wakes up to measure the NRS, which will waste the power consumption of the terminal device 2 on the one hand, and on the other hand the terminal device 2 may miss the paging scheduling message due to inaccurate SINR. In other words, this solution has always been unfair to the terminal device 2.
  • the communication system 20 includes a network device 30 and one or more terminal devices 40 connected to the network device 30.
  • different terminal devices among the multiple terminal devices 40 may communicate with each other.
  • the solution is applied to multiple cycles whose cycle length is the first cycle length, and the multiple cycles include the first cycle and the second cycle. Both the first cycle and the second cycle include M first durations.
  • the first duration includes N paging opportunities.
  • the location distribution of paging opportunities in the first cycle is the same as the location distribution of paging opportunities in the second cycle.
  • M is a positive integer
  • N is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • the network device 30 determines the first target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first cycle, the terminal device 40 determines the first target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first cycle, and the first target pager
  • the relative position in the first period is different from the relative position of the second target paging opportunity in the second period.
  • the second target paging opportunity is the target paging opportunity in the mth first duration of the second period, and m is less than Or any positive integer equal to M.
  • the network device 30 determines the time domain resource on the mth first duration of the first cycle according to the first target paging opportunity, and the terminal device 40 determines the time domain on the mth first duration of the first cycle according to the first target paging opportunity Resource, the time domain resource is a time domain resource in a time-frequency resource used to transmit a reference signal. Furthermore, the network device 30 sends a reference signal to the terminal device 40 on the time-frequency resource, and the terminal device 40 receives the reference signal from the network device 30 on the time-frequency resource. Among them, the specific implementation of the solution will be described in detail in the subsequent method embodiments, and will not be repeated here.
  • the reference signal is also sent, and the first target pager in the m-th first duration of the first period associated with the reference signal.
  • the relative position in the first period will be different from the relative position of the second target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the second period associated with the reference signal in the second period. From the perspective of the terminal device Since one paging opportunity is monitored in each discontinuous reception cycle, the position of the paging opportunity monitored by different terminal devices may be different.
  • the solution is for multiple It is fairer for the terminal equipment.
  • the network device 30 in the embodiment of the present application is a device that connects the terminal device 40 to the wireless network, and may be an evolved Node B (evolutional Node B in long term evolution (LTE)). eNB or eNodeB); or the base station (Base Transceiver Station, BTS) in GSM or CDMA; or the base station (NodeB) in the WCDMA system; or the fifth generation (5G) network or the future evolution of the public land mobile network ( Base stations in public land mobile network (PLMN), broadband network service gateways (broadband network gateway, BNG), aggregation switches or non-third generation partnership project (3rd generation partnership project, 3GPP) access equipment, etc., examples of this application There is no specific restriction on this.
  • the base stations in the embodiments of the present application may include various forms of base stations, such as macro base stations, micro base stations (also called small stations), relay stations, access points, etc., which are not specifically limited in the embodiments of the present application .
  • the terminal device 40 in the embodiment of the present application may be a device for implementing wireless communication functions, such as a terminal or a chip that can be used in a terminal.
  • the terminal may be a user equipment (UE), an access terminal, a terminal unit, a terminal station, a mobile station, a mobile station, a remote station, a remote terminal, a mobile device, and wireless communication in a 5G network or a future evolved PLMN.
  • the access terminal can be a cellular phone, a cordless phone, a session initiation protocol (SIP) phone, a wireless local loop (WLL) station, a personal digital assistant (PDA), with wireless communication Functional handheld devices, computing devices or other processing devices connected to wireless modems, vehicle-mounted devices or wearable devices, virtual reality (VR) terminal devices, augmented reality (AR) terminal devices, industrial control (industrial) Wireless terminal in control), wireless terminal in self-driving, wireless terminal in remote medical, wireless terminal in smart grid, wireless terminal in transportation safety (transportation safety) Terminal, wireless terminal in smart city, wireless terminal in smart home, etc.
  • the terminal can be mobile or fixed.
  • the network device 30 and the terminal device 40 in the embodiment of the present application may also be referred to as a communication device, which may be a general-purpose device or a dedicated device, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 3 it is a schematic structural diagram of the network device 30 and the terminal device 40 provided in this embodiment of the application.
  • the terminal device 40 includes at least one processor (in FIG. 3 exemplarily includes a processor 401 as an example for illustration) and at least one transceiver (in FIG. 3 exemplarily includes a transceiver 403 as an example for illustration) ).
  • the terminal device 40 may further include at least one memory (in FIG. 3 exemplarily includes a memory 402 as an example for illustration), at least one output device (in FIG. 3 exemplarily, an output device 404 is included as an example.
  • an input device in FIG. 3, an input device 405 is included as an example for description).
  • the processor 401, the memory 402, and the transceiver 403 are connected through a communication line.
  • the communication line may include a path to transmit information between the aforementioned components.
  • the processor 401 may be a general-purpose central processing unit (central processing unit, CPU), a microprocessor, an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), or one or more integrated circuits for controlling the execution of the program of the application Circuit.
  • CPU central processing unit
  • ASIC application-specific integrated circuit
  • the processor 401 may also include multiple CPUs, and the processor 401 may be a single-CPU processor or a multi-CPU processor.
  • the processor here may refer to one or more devices, circuits, or processing cores for processing data (for example, computer program instructions).
  • the memory 402 may be a device having a storage function. For example, it can be read-only memory (ROM) or other types of static storage devices that can store static information and instructions, random access memory (RAM), or other types that can store information and instructions Dynamic storage devices can also be electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), compact disc read-only memory (CD-ROM), or other optical disk storage, optical disc storage ( Including compact discs, laser discs, optical discs, digital universal discs, Blu-ray discs, etc.), magnetic disk storage media or other magnetic storage devices, or can be used to carry or store desired program codes in the form of instructions or data structures and can be stored by a computer Any other media taken, but not limited to this.
  • the memory 402 may exist independently and is connected to the processor 401 through a communication line.
  • the memory 402 may also be integrated with the processor 401.
  • the memory 402 is used to store computer execution instructions for executing the solution of the present application, and the processor 401 controls the execution.
  • the processor 401 is configured to execute computer-executable instructions stored in the memory 402, so as to implement the reference signal receiving method described in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the processor 401 may also perform processing-related functions in the reference signal receiving method provided in the following embodiments of the present application, and the transceiver 403 is responsible for communicating with other devices or communication networks.
  • the embodiment of the application does not specifically limit this.
  • the computer execution instructions in the embodiments of the present application may also be referred to as application program codes or computer program codes, which are not specifically limited in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the transceiver 403 can use any device such as a transceiver to communicate with other devices or communication networks, such as Ethernet, radio access network (RAN), or wireless local area networks (WLAN) Wait.
  • the transceiver 403 includes a transmitter (transmitter, Tx) and a receiver (receiver, Rx).
  • the output device 404 communicates with the processor 401 and can display information in a variety of ways.
  • the output device 404 may be a liquid crystal display (LCD), a light emitting diode (LED) display device, a cathode ray tube (CRT) display device, or a projector (projector) Wait.
  • LCD liquid crystal display
  • LED light emitting diode
  • CRT cathode ray tube
  • projector projector
  • the input device 405 communicates with the processor 401 and can accept user input in a variety of ways.
  • the input device 405 may be a mouse, a keyboard, a touch screen device, or a sensor device.
  • the network device 30 includes at least one processor (in FIG. 3 exemplarily includes a processor 301 as an example for illustration), at least one transceiver (in FIG. 3 exemplarily includes a transceiver 303 as an example for illustration), and At least one network interface (in FIG. 3, one network interface 304 is included as an example for illustration).
  • the network device 30 may further include at least one memory (in FIG. 3, one memory 302 is included as an example for illustration).
  • the processor 301, the memory 302, the transceiver 303, and the network interface 304 are connected through a communication line.
  • the network interface 304 is used to connect to the core network device through a link (for example, the S1 interface), or to connect with the network interface of other network devices through a wired or wireless link (for example, the X2 interface) (not shown in FIG. 3).
  • the application embodiment does not specifically limit this.
  • the processor 301, the memory 302, and the transceiver 303 reference may be made to the description of the processor 401, the memory 402, and the transceiver 403 in the terminal device 40, which will not be repeated here.
  • FIG. 4 is a specific structural form of the terminal device 40 provided in an embodiment of the application.
  • the functions of the processor 401 in FIG. 3 may be implemented by the processor 110 in FIG. 4.
  • the function of the transceiver 403 in FIG. 3 may be implemented by the antenna 1, antenna 2, mobile communication module 150, wireless communication module 160, etc. in FIG. 4.
  • antenna 1 and antenna 2 are used to transmit and receive electromagnetic wave signals.
  • Each antenna in the terminal device 40 can be used to cover a single or multiple communication frequency bands. Different antennas can also be reused to improve antenna utilization.
  • antenna 1 can be multiplexed as a diversity antenna of a wireless local area network.
  • the antenna can be used in combination with a tuning switch.
  • the mobile communication module 150 may provide a wireless communication solution including 2G/3G/4G/5G and the like applied to the terminal device 40.
  • the mobile communication module 150 may include at least one filter, switch, power amplifier, low noise amplifier (LNA), etc.
  • the mobile communication module 150 can receive electromagnetic waves by the antenna 1, and perform processing such as filtering, amplifying and transmitting the received electromagnetic waves to the modem processor for demodulation.
  • the mobile communication module 150 can also amplify the signal modulated by the modem processor, and convert it into electromagnetic waves for radiation via the antenna 1.
  • at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 may be provided in the processor 110.
  • at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 and at least part of the modules of the processor 110 may be provided in the same device.
  • the wireless communication module 160 can provide applications on the terminal device 40, including wireless local area networks (wireless local area networks, WLAN) (such as Wi-Fi networks), Bluetooth (blue tooth, BT), global navigation satellite system (global navigation satellite system, GNSS), frequency modulation (FM), near field communication (NFC), infrared technology (infrared, IR) and other wireless communication solutions.
  • the wireless communication module 160 may be one or more devices integrating at least one communication processing module.
  • the wireless communication module 160 receives electromagnetic waves via the antenna 2, frequency modulates and filters the electromagnetic wave signals, and sends the processed signals to the processor 110.
  • the wireless communication module 160 can also receive the signal to be sent from the processor 110, perform frequency modulation, amplify it, and convert it into electromagnetic wave radiation via the antenna 2.
  • the wireless communication module 160 may provide an NFC wireless communication solution applied to the terminal device 40, which means that the first device includes an NFC chip.
  • the NFC chip can improve the NFC wireless communication function.
  • the wireless communication module 160 can provide a NFC wireless communication solution applied to the terminal device 40, which means that the first device includes an electronic tag (such as radio frequency identification, RFID) tags ).
  • the NFC chip of other devices close to the electronic tag can perform NFC wireless communication with the second device.
  • the antenna 1 of the terminal device 40 is coupled with the mobile communication module 150, and the antenna 2 is coupled with the wireless communication module 160, so that the terminal device 40 can communicate with the network and other devices through wireless communication technology.
  • the wireless communication technologies may include global system for mobile communications (GSM), general packet radio service (GPRS), code division multiple access (CDMA), broadband Code division multiple access (wideband code division multiple access, WCDMA), time-division code division multiple access (TD-SCDMA), long term evolution (LTE), BT, GNSS, WLAN, NFC , FM, or IR technology, etc.
  • the GNSS may include global positioning system (GPS), global navigation satellite system (GLONASS), Beidou navigation satellite system (BDS), quasi-zenith satellite system (quasi -zenith satellite system, QZSS) or satellite-based augmentation systems (SBAS).
  • GPS global positioning system
  • GLONASS global navigation satellite system
  • BDS Beidou navigation satellite system
  • QZSS quasi-zenith satellite system
  • SBAS satellite-based augmentation systems
  • the function of the memory 402 in FIG. 3 may be implemented by an external memory (such as a Micro SD card) connected to the internal memory 121 or the external memory interface 120 in FIG. 4.
  • an external memory such as a Micro SD card
  • the function of the output device 404 in FIG. 3 may be implemented through the display screen 194 in FIG. 4.
  • the display screen 194 is used to display images, videos, and so on.
  • the display screen 194 includes a display panel.
  • the function of the input device 405 in FIG. 3 may be implemented by a mouse, a keyboard, a touch screen device, or the sensor module 180 in FIG. 4.
  • the sensor module 180 may include, for example, a pressure sensor 180A, a gyroscope sensor 180B, an air pressure sensor 180C, a magnetic sensor 180D, an acceleration sensor 180E, a distance sensor 180F, a proximity light sensor 180G, and a fingerprint sensor 180H.
  • a pressure sensor 180A a pressure sensor 180A
  • a gyroscope sensor 180B an air pressure sensor 180C
  • a magnetic sensor 180D e.g., a MEMS acceleration sensor 180E
  • a distance sensor 180F e.g., a distance sensor 180F
  • a proximity light sensor 180G e.g., a a proximity light sensor 180G
  • a fingerprint sensor 180H e.g., a fingerprint sensor 180H.
  • the terminal device 40 may also include an audio module 170, a camera 193, an indicator 192, a motor 191, a button 190, a SIM card interface 195, a USB interface 130, a charging management module 140, One or more of the power management module 141 and the battery 142, where the audio module 170 can be connected to a speaker 170A (also called a “speaker”), a receiver 170B (also called a “handset”), a microphone 170C (also called a “microphone”, “Microphone”) or the earphone interface 170D, etc., which are not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • a speaker 170A also called a “speaker”
  • a receiver 170B also called a “handset”
  • a microphone 170C also called a “microphone”, "Microphone”
  • the earphone interface 170D etc.
  • the structure shown in FIG. 4 does not constitute a specific limitation on the terminal device 40.
  • the terminal device 40 may include more or fewer components than shown in the figure, or combine certain components, or split certain components, or arrange different components.
  • the illustrated components can be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of software and hardware.
  • the method for receiving and sending the reference signal provided by the embodiment of the present application will be explained in an expanded manner.
  • the method is applied to multiple cycles whose cycle length is the first cycle length, and the multiple cycles include the first cycle and the second cycle.
  • Both the first cycle and the second cycle include M first durations.
  • the first duration includes N paging opportunities.
  • the location distribution of paging opportunities in the first cycle is the same as the location distribution of paging opportunities in the second cycle.
  • M is a positive integer
  • N is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • the parameter N may be configured by a network device, or may be specified by a protocol, and is not specifically limited here.
  • the parameter M may be configured by a network device, or may be specified by a protocol, and is not specifically limited here.
  • a reference signal receiving and sending method includes the following steps:
  • the network device determines the first target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first period.
  • the relative position of the first target paging opportunity in the first period is different from the relative position of the second target paging opportunity in the second period
  • the second target paging opportunity is the target in the mth first duration of the second period Paging opportunity
  • m is any positive integer less than or equal to M.
  • the network device determining the first target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first period may specifically include: the network device determining the first offset, the first offset Used to indicate the position of the first target paging opportunity among the N paging opportunities in the m-th first duration of the first cycle; the network device determines the position of the m-th first duration of the first cycle according to the first offset The first target paging opportunity.
  • the first target paging opportunity in the embodiment of the present application may be one or more, and the network device determines the first target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first period according to the first offset, specifically It may include: if there is one first target paging opportunity, the network device determines the first target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first period according to the first offset; or, if there are multiple first target paging opportunities , The network device determines the first paging opportunity or the last paging opportunity in the first target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first period according to the first offset.
  • the network device determines the first target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first period according to the first offset, which may specifically include: the network device according to the N bits
  • the bitmap and the first offset determine the first target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first cycle, where each bit in the N-bit bitmap is used to indicate one of the N paging opportunities. Whether each paging opportunity is associated with a reference signal.
  • the network device determines the first target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first period according to the first offset, which may specifically include: the network device determines the first period
  • the index of the paging opportunity in the m-th first duration (which can be characterized by PO_Index), the index of the paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first cycle is the index of the m-th first duration of the first cycle Index of the paging opportunity in the first cycle or reference signal cycle.
  • the network device determines the index of the first target paging opportunity (PO_Index1) in the m-th first period of the first period from the index of the paging opportunity in the m-th first period of the first period according to the first offset. ; The network device determines the first target paging opportunity according to the index of the first target paging opportunity.
  • PO_Index may be determined according to the frame number of the paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first period.
  • i_s and i_s please refer to the above formula (a) and formula (b), which will not be repeated here.
  • the first offset 1
  • PO_Index mod N 0 mod 2 ⁇ the first offset, so the paging opportunity with PO_Index of 128 is not the first target Paging opportunity.
  • PO_Index mod N 2 mod 2 ⁇ the first offset, so the paging opportunity with PO_Index of 128 is not the first target Paging opportunities, and so on.
  • the network device determining the first target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first period may specifically include: the network device determining the second parameter value according to R, PO_Index, and N,
  • the two parameter values are used to characterize whether the paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first cycle is the first target paging opportunity, where N is the number of paging opportunities in the m-th first duration of the first cycle, PO_Index is the index of the paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first cycle, PO_Index is determined according to the frame number of the paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first cycle; R is based on the first cycle The superframe number and frame number of the paging opportunity in the mth first duration are determined.
  • the network device determines a time domain resource on the m-th first duration of the first cycle according to the first target paging opportunity, where the time domain resource is a time domain resource in a time-frequency resource used for transmitting a reference signal.
  • the time-domain resource in the time-frequency resource in the embodiment of the present application is the time-domain resource in the time-frequency resource used for transmitting the reference signal.
  • the frequency domain resource in the time-frequency resource may be, for example, the frequency domain resource in the time-frequency resource where the paging opportunity is currently located, that is, the frequency domain resource and the paging opportunity in the time-frequency resource for transmitting the reference signal
  • the frequency domain resources in the current time-frequency resource may be the same frequency domain resource.
  • the frequency domain resource in the time-frequency resource may not be the frequency domain resource in the time-frequency resource where the paging opportunity is currently located, that is, the frequency domain resource in the time-frequency resource for transmitting the reference signal is the same as
  • the frequency domain resources in the time-frequency resource where the paging opportunity is currently located may not be the same frequency domain resource.
  • the network device may indicate the frequency domain resource in the time-frequency resource for transmitting the reference signal to the terminal device through the first frequency domain resource indication parameter, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal device determines the first target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first period.
  • step S501 For the related description of the first target paging opportunity, please refer to the above step S501, which will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal device determining the first target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first period may specifically include: the terminal device determining the first offset, the first offset It is used to indicate the position of the first target paging opportunity among the N paging opportunities in the m-th first duration of the first cycle; the terminal device determines the position of the m-th first duration of the first cycle according to the first offset The first target paging opportunity.
  • the first target paging opportunity in the embodiment of the present application may be one or more, and the terminal device determines the first target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first cycle according to the first offset, specifically It may include: if there is one first target paging opportunity, the terminal device determines the first target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first cycle according to the first offset; or, if there are multiple first target paging opportunities , The terminal device determines the first paging opportunity or the last paging opportunity in the first target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first cycle according to the first offset.
  • the network device may send an N-bit bitmap to the terminal device, and the terminal device may receive the N-bit bitmap from the network device.
  • each bit in the N-bit bitmap is used to indicate whether each of the N paging opportunities is associated with a reference signal.
  • determining the first target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first period by the terminal device according to the first offset may specifically include: the terminal device determines the first target paging opportunity according to the N-bit bitmap and the first offset The first target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first cycle.
  • the terminal device determines the first target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first period according to the first offset, which may specifically include: the terminal device determines the first period
  • the index of the paging opportunity in the m-th first duration (which can be characterized by PO_Index), the index of the paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first cycle is the index of the m-th first duration of the first cycle Index of the paging opportunity in the first cycle or reference signal cycle.
  • the terminal device determines the index (PO_Index1) of the first target paging opportunity in the m-th first period of the first period from the index of the paging opportunity in the m-th first period of the first period according to the first offset. ; The terminal device determines the first target paging opportunity according to the index of the first target paging opportunity.
  • the terminal device determining the first target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first period may specifically include: the terminal device determining the second parameter value according to R, PO_Index, and N,
  • the second parameter value is used to characterize whether the paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first period is the first target paging opportunity.
  • the second parameter value, N, R, and PO_Index please refer to the above step S501. This will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal device determines, according to the first target paging opportunity, a time domain resource on the m-th first duration of the first period, where the time domain resource is a time domain resource in a time-frequency resource used to transmit a reference signal.
  • the network device sends a reference signal to the terminal device on the time-frequency resource, and the terminal device receives the reference signal from the network device on the time-frequency resource.
  • the terminal device and the network device may determine the paging opportunity as the target paging opportunity, and then according to the paging opportunity
  • the time domain resource on the mth first duration of the first period is determined, where the time domain resource is a time domain resource in a time-frequency resource used to transmit a reference signal, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the parameter N and the parameter X may be the same or different, and are not specifically limited here.
  • the parameter X may not be configured, and the cycle length of the default reference signal is equal to N*the first cycle length, which is not specifically limited here.
  • first cycle and the second cycle in the embodiment of the present application may both be DRX cycles.
  • first period and the second period may also be other periods larger than the DRX period or smaller than the DRX period, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the reference signal in the embodiment of the present application may be, for example, an NRS.
  • the reference signal subframe associated with the first target paging opportunity may be one or more, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the first offset in the embodiment of the present application may be configured by the network device, may also be calculated by the network device and the terminal device, or may be specified by the protocol, which is not specifically limited here.
  • the first offset is determined according to the first parameter value, the first period length, and N.
  • the first parameter value may be determined according to one or more of the frame number at the beginning of the first cycle or the superframe number where the first cycle is located; or the first parameter value may be determined according to the first cycle beginning The frame number, or one or more of the superframe numbers where the first cycle is located, and the cycle length of the reference signal are determined.
  • the first offset, the first parameter value, the first period length, and N may satisfy the following formula (4):
  • the first offset (first parameter value/first period length) mod(N); formula (4)
  • mod means take remainder.
  • cycle_start_SFN may be referred to as SFN 1 for short
  • cycle_H-SFN the superframe number in which the paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first period is located
  • cycle_start_SFN represents the frame number at the beginning of the first cycle
  • the first parameter value cycle_H-SFN*1024+cycle_start_SFN; formula (5)
  • the first parameter value cycle_start_SFN; formula (6)
  • the first parameter value cycle_H-SFN*1024; Formula (7)
  • cycle_start_SFN the frame number at the beginning of the first cycle
  • the superframe number where the first cycle is located is marked as cycle_H-SFN
  • cycle_start_SFN the first parameter value, and the cycle length of the reference signal (assumed as T2)
  • T2 One cycle length
  • one or more of cycle_start_SFN or cycle_H-SFN, the first parameter value, and the cycle length of the reference signal can satisfy the following formula (8), formula (9) or formula ( 10):
  • the first parameter value (cycle_H-SFN*1024+cycle_start_SFN)mod(T2); formula (8)
  • first offset (floor (First parameter value/first period length)) mod(N), floor means rounding down, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal device and the network device may also determine the first target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first period by using the above-mentioned method to determine The second target paging opportunity will not be repeated here.
  • DRX cycle 128 system frames (may be referred to as frames for short)
  • one superframe 8 DRX cycles, which are respectively recorded as the first DRX cycle here Cycle, the 2nd DRX cycle,..., the sth DRX cycle,..., the 8th DRX cycle, s is a positive integer.
  • the frame number at the beginning of the sth DRX cycle is marked as cycle(s)_start_SFN, for example, the frame number at the beginning of the first DRX cycle is marked as cycle1_start_SFN.
  • the superframe number where the sth DRX cycle is located is marked as cycle(s)_H-SFN, for example, the superframe number where the first DRX cycle is located is marked as cycle1_H-SFN. It is assumed here that cycle1_H-SFN to cycle8_H-SFN are all 0, that is, the superframe in which the first DRX cycle to the eighth DRX cycle are located is the first superframe. According to the above formula (5), it can be determined:
  • the first target paging opportunity is one:
  • the first offset in formula (4) is used to indicate the position of the first target paging opportunity among the N paging opportunities in the m-th first duration of the first cycle
  • the first target paging opportunity in the first duration is the first paging opportunity among the 4 paging opportunities .
  • the first target paging opportunity in the first duration is the second paging opportunity among the four paging opportunities.
  • the first target paging opportunity in the first duration is the third paging opportunity among the four paging opportunities.
  • the first target paging opportunity in the first duration is the fourth paging opportunity among the four paging opportunities.
  • the first target paging opportunity in the first duration is the first paging opportunity among the four paging opportunities.
  • the first target paging opportunity in the first duration is the second paging opportunity among the four paging opportunities.
  • the first target paging opportunity in the first duration is the third paging opportunity among the four paging opportunities.
  • the first target paging opportunity in the first duration is the fourth paging opportunity among the four paging opportunities.
  • the first offset in formula (4) is used to indicate that the first paging opportunity in the first target paging opportunity is Position in N paging opportunities on the m-th first duration of a cycle:
  • the first DRX cycle there are 4 target paging opportunities in the first first duration.
  • the first target paging opportunity in the first duration is the second paging opportunity, the third paging opportunity, and the fourth paging opportunity among the four paging opportunities.
  • the target paging opportunity in the first first duration is the third paging opportunity, the fourth paging opportunity, and the first paging opportunity among the four paging opportunities.
  • the target paging opportunity in the first first duration is the fourth paging opportunity, the first paging opportunity, and the second paging opportunity among the four paging opportunities.
  • the target paging opportunity in the first first duration is the first paging opportunity, the second paging opportunity, and the third paging opportunity among the four paging opportunities.
  • the first target paging opportunity in the first duration is the second paging opportunity, the third paging opportunity, and the fourth paging opportunity among the four paging opportunities.
  • the first target paging opportunity in the first duration is the third paging opportunity, the fourth paging opportunity, and the first paging opportunity among the four paging opportunities.
  • the target paging opportunity in the first first duration is the fourth paging opportunity, the first paging opportunity, and the second paging opportunity among the four paging opportunities.
  • the first offset in formula (4) is used to indicate that the last paging opportunity in the first target paging opportunity is in the first The position in N paging opportunities on the m-th first duration of the cycle:
  • the first DRX cycle there are 4 target paging opportunities in the first first duration.
  • the first paging opportunity and the fourth paging opportunity in paging opportunities In the second DRX cycle, the first target paging opportunity in the first duration is the second paging opportunity and the first paging opportunity among the four paging opportunities.
  • the first target paging opportunity in the first duration In the third DRX cycle, the first target paging opportunity in the first duration is the third paging opportunity and the second paging opportunity among the four paging opportunities.
  • the first target paging opportunity in the first duration is the fourth paging opportunity and the third paging opportunity among the four paging opportunities.
  • the target paging opportunity in the first first duration is the first paging opportunity and the fourth paging opportunity among the four paging opportunities.
  • the first target paging opportunity in the first duration is the second paging opportunity and the first paging opportunity among the four paging opportunities.
  • the first target paging opportunity in the first duration is the third paging opportunity and the second paging opportunity among the four paging opportunities.
  • the first target paging opportunity in the first duration is the fourth paging opportunity and the third paging opportunity among the four paging opportunities.
  • bitmap of N bits is 0110, 0 means no reference signal is associated, 1 means reference signal is associated (of course, 0 can also be reference signal associated, 1 means no reference signal is associated, which is not specifically limited here):
  • the first DRX cycle there are 4 target paging opportunities in the first first duration.
  • the second paging opportunity and the third paging opportunity in paging opportunities In the second DRX cycle, the first target paging opportunity in the first duration is the third paging opportunity and the fourth paging opportunity among the four paging opportunities.
  • the first target paging opportunity in the first duration In the third DRX cycle, the first target paging opportunity in the first duration is the fourth paging opportunity and the first paging opportunity among the four paging opportunities.
  • the target paging opportunity in the first first duration is the first paging opportunity and the second paging opportunity among the four paging opportunities.
  • the first target paging opportunity in the first duration is the second paging opportunity and the third paging opportunity among the four paging opportunities.
  • the first target paging opportunity in the first duration is the third paging opportunity and the fourth paging opportunity among the four paging opportunities.
  • the first target paging opportunity in the first duration is the fourth paging opportunity and the first paging opportunity among the four paging opportunities.
  • the target paging opportunity in the first first duration is the first paging opportunity and the second paging opportunity among the four paging opportunities.
  • the period of the reference signal is 4 DRX periods.
  • Each of the N POs on the first duration has an associated reference signal in different DRX cycles, and since the terminal device only monitors one PO in each DRX cycle, the positions of the POs monitored by different terminal devices are different Therefore, when the POs monitored by different terminal devices are different, in multiple different DRX cycles, the POs monitored by different terminal devices have the opportunity to associate reference signals in one of the DRX cycles, instead of the monitoring of some terminal devices PO has never been associated with a reference signal, so this solution is more fair to multiple terminal devices.
  • This scheme is more fair to multiple terminal devices.
  • DRX cycle 128 system frames (can be referred to as frames for short)
  • one superframe 8 DRX cycles, which are respectively recorded as the first DRX cycle here Cycle, the 2nd DRX cycle,..., the sth DRX cycle,..., the 8th DRX cycle, s is a positive integer.
  • the frame number at the beginning of the sth DRX cycle is marked as cycle(s)_start_SFN, for example, the frame number at the beginning of the first DRX cycle is marked as cycle1_start_SFN.
  • the first target paging opportunity is one:
  • the first offset in formula (4) is used to indicate the position of the first target paging opportunity among the N paging opportunities in the m-th first duration of the first cycle
  • the first target paging opportunity in the first duration is the first paging opportunity among the 4 paging opportunities .
  • the first target paging opportunity in the first duration is the second paging opportunity among the four paging opportunities.
  • the first target paging opportunity in the first duration is the first paging opportunity among the four paging opportunities.
  • the first target paging opportunity in the first duration is the second paging opportunity among the four paging opportunities.
  • the first target paging opportunity in the first duration is the first paging opportunity among the four paging opportunities.
  • the first target paging opportunity in the first duration is the second paging opportunity among the four paging opportunities.
  • the first target paging opportunity in the first duration is the first paging opportunity among the four paging opportunities.
  • the first target paging opportunity in the first duration is the second paging opportunity among the four paging opportunities.
  • the first offset in formula (4) is used to indicate that the first paging opportunity in the first target paging opportunity is Position in N paging opportunities on the m-th first duration of a cycle:
  • the first target paging opportunity in the first duration is the second paging opportunity, the third paging opportunity, and the fourth paging opportunity among the four paging opportunities.
  • the target paging opportunity in the first first duration is the first paging opportunity, the second paging opportunity, and the third paging opportunity among the four paging opportunities.
  • the first target paging opportunity in the first duration is the second paging opportunity, the third paging opportunity, and the fourth paging opportunity among the four paging opportunities.
  • the target paging opportunity in the first first duration is the first paging opportunity, the second paging opportunity, and the third paging opportunity among the four paging opportunities.
  • the first target paging opportunity in the first duration is the second paging opportunity, the third paging opportunity, and the fourth paging opportunity among the four paging opportunities.
  • the target paging opportunity in the first first duration is the first paging opportunity, the second paging opportunity, and the third paging opportunity among the four paging opportunities.
  • the first target paging opportunity in the first duration is the second paging opportunity, the third paging opportunity, and the fourth paging opportunity among the four paging opportunities.
  • the first offset in formula (4) is used to indicate that the last paging opportunity in the first target paging opportunity is in the first The position in N paging opportunities on the m-th first duration of the cycle:
  • the first DRX cycle there are 4 target paging opportunities in the first first duration.
  • the first paging opportunity and the fourth paging opportunity in paging opportunities In the second DRX cycle, the first target paging opportunity in the first duration is the second paging opportunity and the first paging opportunity among the four paging opportunities.
  • the target paging opportunity in the first first duration is the first paging opportunity and the fourth paging opportunity among the four paging opportunities.
  • the first target paging opportunity in the first duration is the second paging opportunity and the first paging opportunity among the four paging opportunities.
  • the target paging opportunity in the first first duration is the first paging opportunity and the fourth paging opportunity among the four paging opportunities.
  • the first target paging opportunity in the first duration is the second paging opportunity and the first paging opportunity among the four paging opportunities.
  • the target paging opportunity in the first first duration is the first paging opportunity and the fourth paging opportunity among the four paging opportunities.
  • the target paging opportunity in the first first duration is the second paging opportunity and the first paging opportunity among the four paging opportunities.
  • bitmap of N bits is 0110, 0 means no reference signal is associated, 1 means reference signal is associated (of course, 0 can also be reference signal associated, 1 means no reference signal is associated, which is not specifically limited here):
  • the second paging opportunity and the third paging opportunity in paging opportunities In the second DRX cycle, the first target paging opportunity in the first duration is the third paging opportunity and the fourth paging opportunity among the four paging opportunities.
  • the first target paging opportunity in the first duration is the second paging opportunity and the third paging opportunity among the four paging opportunities.
  • the first target paging opportunity in the first duration is the third paging opportunity and the fourth paging opportunity among the four paging opportunities.
  • the first target paging opportunity in the first duration is the second paging opportunity and the third paging opportunity among the four paging opportunities.
  • the first target paging opportunity in the first duration is the third paging opportunity and the fourth paging opportunity among the four paging opportunities.
  • the first target paging opportunity in the first duration is the second paging opportunity and the third paging opportunity among the four paging opportunities.
  • the first target paging opportunity in the first duration is the third paging opportunity and the fourth paging opportunity among the four paging opportunities.
  • the period of the reference signal is 2 DRX periods.
  • Multiple POs of the N POs on the first duration all have associated reference signals in different DRX cycles, and since the terminal device only monitors one PO in each DRX cycle, the positions of the POs monitored by different terminal devices are different Therefore, when the POs monitored by different terminal devices are different, in multiple different DRX cycles, the POs monitored by different terminal devices have the opportunity to associate reference signals in one of the DRX cycles, instead of the monitoring of some terminal devices PO has never been associated with a reference signal, so this solution is more fair to multiple terminal devices.
  • the superframe number of the t-th cycle is marked as cycle(t)_H-SFN, and t is a positive integer, such as the superframe of the first cycle
  • the symbol is cycle1_H-SFN, then according to the above formula (7), it can be determined:
  • the first target paging opportunity is one:
  • the first offset in formula (4) is used to indicate that the first paging opportunity in the first target paging opportunity is Position in N paging opportunities on the m-th first duration of a cycle:
  • the distribution of target paging opportunities in each superframe is similar to that shown in Fig. 7, and only the DRX cycle in Fig. 7 It can be replaced with a period of 1 superframe, which is not repeated here.
  • the first offset in formula (4) is used to indicate that the last paging opportunity in the first target paging opportunity is in the first The position in N paging opportunities on the m-th first duration of the cycle:
  • the distribution of target paging opportunities in each superframe is similar to that in FIG. 8, and only the DRX cycle in FIG. It can be replaced with a period of 1 superframe, which is not repeated here.
  • bitmap of N bits is 0110, 0 means no reference signal is associated, 1 means reference signal is associated (of course, 0 can also be reference signal associated, 1 means no reference signal is associated, which is not specifically limited here):
  • the distribution of target paging opportunities in each superframe is similar to that shown in FIG. 9, and only the DRX cycle in FIG. It can be replaced with a period of 1 superframe, which is not repeated here.
  • the superframe number of the t-th cycle is marked as cycle(t)_H-SFN, and t is a positive integer, such as the superframe of the first cycle
  • the symbol is cycle1_H-SFN, and the period of the reference signal is 2 superframes.
  • the first target paging opportunity is one:
  • the first offset in formula (4) is used to indicate that the first paging opportunity in the first target paging opportunity is Position in N paging opportunities on the m-th first duration of a cycle:
  • the distribution of target paging opportunities in each superframe is similar to that in FIG. 11, and only the DRX cycle in FIG. It can be replaced with a period of 1 superframe, which is not repeated here.
  • the period of the reference signal is 4 superframes in this example
  • the final distribution diagram of target paging opportunities in different superframes is similar to that of Fig. 7, and it is only necessary to replace the DRX period in Fig. 7 with the period here.
  • the period of the length is 1 superframe, which is not repeated here.
  • the first offset in formula (4) is used to indicate that the last paging opportunity in the first target paging opportunity is in the first The position in N paging opportunities on the m-th first duration of the cycle:
  • the distribution of target paging opportunities in each superframe is similar to that of FIG. 12, and only the DRX cycle in FIG. It can be replaced with a period of 1 superframe, which is not repeated here.
  • the period of the reference signal is 4 superframes in this example
  • the final distribution diagram of target paging opportunities in different superframes is similar to that of FIG. 8. It is only necessary to replace the DRX period in FIG. 8 with the period here.
  • the period of the length is 1 superframe, which is not repeated here.
  • bitmap of N bits is 0110, 0 means no reference signal is associated, 1 means reference signal is associated (of course, 0 can also be reference signal associated, 1 means no reference signal is associated, which is not specifically limited here):
  • the distribution of target paging opportunities in each superframe is similar to that in FIG. 13, and only the DRX cycle in FIG. It can be replaced with a period of 1 superframe, which is not repeated here.
  • the period of the reference signal is 4 superframes in this example
  • the final distribution diagram of target paging opportunities in different superframes is similar to that of Fig. 9, and it is only necessary to replace the DRX period in Fig. 9 with the period here.
  • the period of the length is 1 superframe, which is not repeated here.
  • the first offset is determined according to the first parameter value and N.
  • the first parameter value may be determined according to one or more of the frame number at the beginning of the first cycle, or the superframe number where the first cycle is located, and the cycle length of the reference signal and the first cycle length.
  • the first offset, the first parameter value, and N may satisfy the following formula (11):
  • the first offset (the first parameter value) mod(N); formula (11)
  • mod means take remainder.
  • cycle_start_SFN the superframe number where the first cycle is located
  • one or more of cycle_start_SFN or cycle_H-SFN, the first parameter value, and the period length of the reference signal (assumed as T2) and T1 can satisfy the following formula (12), formula (13) or formula ( 14):
  • the first parameter value (cycle_H-SFN*1024+cycle_start_SFN)mod(T2)/T1; formula (12)
  • the terminal device and the network device may also determine the first target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first period by using the above-mentioned method to determine The second target paging opportunity will not be repeated here.
  • DRX cycle 128 system frames (may be referred to as frames for short)
  • one superframe 8 DRX cycles, which are respectively recorded as the first DRX cycle here Cycle, the 2nd DRX cycle,..., the sth DRX cycle,..., the 8th DRX cycle, s is a positive integer.
  • the frame number at the beginning of the sth DRX cycle is marked as cycle(s)_start_SFN, for example, the frame number at the beginning of the first DRX cycle is marked as cycle1_start_SFN.
  • the distribution of the target paging opportunity in each DRX cycle can refer to the examples shown in FIG. 10 to FIG. 13, which will not be repeated here.
  • the superframe number of the t-th cycle is marked as cycle(t)_H-SFN, and t is a positive integer, such as the superframe of the first cycle
  • the symbol is cycle1_H-SFN, and the period of the reference signal is 2 superframes.
  • the distribution of target paging opportunities in each superframe is similar to the examples shown in Figures 10 to 13, and it is only necessary to replace the DRX cycle in Figures 10 to 13 with the cycle here.
  • the period of the length is 1 superframe, which is not repeated here.
  • the first offset determined according to formula (11) can also be understood as the relative number of the first period in the period of the reference signal, which is explained here in a unified manner, and will not be repeated hereafter.
  • the paging frame number may also be considered.
  • the first offset is determined according to the first parameter value and N, which may include: the first offset is determined according to the first parameter value, N, and a pseudo-random sequence.
  • the first offset, the first parameter value, the pseudo-random sequence, and N may satisfy the following formula (15):
  • the pseudo-random sequence is a pseudo-random sequence related to the first parameter value
  • f (pseudo-random sequence) is a function determined by the pseudo-random sequence.
  • the pseudo-random sequence here may be a Gold sequence, for example.
  • the method for determining the pseudo-random sequence according to the first parameter value may be: initializing the pseudo-random sequence with the first parameter value and taking the value of the pseudo-random sequence with a fixed position.
  • the initialization seed of the Gold sequence can be set as the first parameter value, and then the value of a fixed-bit pseudo-random sequence can be taken.
  • the method for determining the pseudo-random sequence according to the first parameter value may be: initialize with a fixed value, and take the value at the position of the first parameter value in the pseudo-random sequence. For example, the initial seed of the Gold sequence is set to 35, and then the value at the position of the first parameter value in the pseudo-random sequence is taken.
  • the first offset obtained according to formula (15) is a random value from 0 to (N-1). Assuming that the corresponding first parameter values in different periods are different, if the first parameter value is the relative number of the current DRX period in the reference signal period, then in a reference signal period, in different DRX periods, according to f(pseudo-random The value obtained by the sequence) is different, and then the offset obtained according to the formula (15) is different, so that the position of the target paging opportunity on the m-th first duration is different.
  • the target paging opportunity is associated with the reference signal, and the terminal device only monitors one paging opportunity in each DRX cycle, when different terminal devices monitor different paging opportunities, in multiple different DRX cycles, different terminal devices monitor All paging opportunities have the opportunity to associate a reference signal in one of the DRX cycles, and the paging opportunities that are not monitored by some terminal devices have no associated reference signals, so this solution is more fair for multiple terminal devices.
  • the foregoing embodiments of the present application are all described by taking the method of determining the target paging opportunity on the m-th first duration in different periods as an example.
  • the relative positions of the determined target paging opportunities are the same on different first durations of the same period.
  • the determined relative position of the target paging opportunity may be different at different first durations of the same period.
  • the reference signal period is composed of a large number of N PO sets, and the first offset is N
  • the relative number of each PO set in the period of the reference signal is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the time domain resource on the m-th first duration may include, for example, the subframe corresponding to each paging opportunity in the first target paging opportunity, and the subframe before the subframe corresponding to each paging opportunity.
  • X1 subframes can be the first X1 (consecutive) subframes within Z1 subframes before the subframe corresponding to each paging opportunity, where Z1 can be notified by the network device or agreed upon by agreement, for example, agreed upon by agreement Z1 is equal to 10, and the Y1 subframes may be the last Y1 consecutive subframes of the subframe corresponding to each paging opportunity.
  • X1 and Y1 can be notified by the network device, or agreed upon by the agreement.
  • the sum of X1 and Y1 may be related to the value of nB, where nB represents the number of paging opportunities in the discontinuous reception period.
  • X1 subframes before the subframe corresponding to each paging opportunity in the first target paging opportunity or Y1 subframes after the subframe corresponding to each paging opportunity may be in the first target paging opportunity.
  • the m-th first time length may or may not be the m-th first time length.
  • X1 subframes before the subframe corresponding to each paging opportunity in the first target paging opportunity are in the m-m1 first duration
  • Y1 subframes after the subframe corresponding to each paging opportunity are in the m-th subframe.
  • both m1 and m2 are integers, which are not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the reference signal is also sent when there is no paging scheduling message in the NPDCCH, and the mth first period of the first period associated with the reference signal is also sent.
  • the relative position of the first target paging opportunity in the first period in the duration is different from the relative position of the second target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the second period associated with the reference signal in the second period, From the perspective of the terminal device, since each discontinuous reception period monitors a paging opportunity, the location of the paging opportunity monitored by different terminal devices may be different.
  • the paging opportunities monitored by different terminal devices have the opportunity to associate reference signals in one of the discontinuous reception periods, while the paging opportunities monitored by some terminal devices have no associated reference signal. , So the solution is more fair to multiple terminal devices.
  • the actions of the network device in the above steps S501 to S505 may be called by the processor 301 in the network device 30 shown in FIG. 3 to call the application code stored in the memory 302 to instruct the network device to execute.
  • the action of the first terminal device may be executed by the processor 401 in the terminal device 40 shown in FIG. 3 by calling the application program code stored in the memory 402 to instruct the network device to execute, and this embodiment does not impose any limitation on this.
  • a wakeup signal can also be used to associate a reference signal.
  • the corresponding reference signal receiving and sending method is similar to the above method embodiment, for example, the mth first duration of the first period can be determined according to the above After determining the first target WUS in the m-th first duration of the first cycle by means of the first target paging opportunity in, and then determining the time domain resources on the m-th first duration of the first cycle according to the first WUS, The reference signal is received or sent on the corresponding time-frequency resource, which will not be repeated here.
  • the time domain resource on the m-th first duration may include, for example, the start subframe of each WUS in the first WUS, and X2 subframes before the start subframe of each WUS. Frame, or at least one of Y2 subframes after the start subframe of each WUS.
  • X2 subframes can be the first X2 (consecutive) subframes within Z2 subframes before the start subframe of each WUS, where Z2 can be notified by the network device or agreed upon by agreement, for example, agreed upon by agreement Z2 is equal to 10, and Y2 subframes may be consecutive Y2 consecutive subframes after the start subframe of each WUS.
  • X2 and Y2 can be notified by the network device, or agreed upon by the agreement.
  • the sum of X2 and Y2 may be related to the value of nB, where nB represents the number of paging opportunities in the discontinuous reception period.
  • the NRS may be sent around a subset of POs in a DRX cycle.
  • the subsets of POs in different DRX cycles (choose one from N POs) are different .
  • how to determine the subset of PO can be related to some paging configuration parameters.
  • the existing paging configuration parameters include paging density (nB) and the length of the DRX cycle (T). Among them, when the paging density (nB) is greater than the first value, N can be greater than the second value, because the two POs are very close at this time; when the paging density (nB) is less than the third value, N can be less than the fourth value.
  • N can be 1, because the two POs are far apart at this time, where N is a positive integer.
  • the value of N may also be related to the paging density (nB) and the length (T) of the DRX cycle, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the number and/or position of NRSs associated with different POs may be different.
  • some POs are associated with a certain number of NRSs before the PO, some POs are associated with a certain number of POs and after the PO.
  • some POs have a large number of NRSs associated with them, and some POs have a small number of NRSs associated with them.
  • This NRS transmission method may be written through an agreement or configured through a network, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the application.
  • the existing NB-IoT has three deployment modes, including in-band operation, guard-band operation, and stand-alone opetation.
  • the in-band operation mode is divided into in-band same-physical cell identities (PCI) and in-band different-PCI.
  • PCI in-band same-physical cell identities
  • the terminal equipment of the NB-IoT system can assume that the NB-IoT system and the LTE system have the same PCI, and that the LTE cell reference signal (cell reference signal, CRS) and NRS can be the same
  • LTE cell reference signal cell reference signal
  • NRS LTE cell reference signal
  • the network equipment may send some NRSs to the terminal equipment on a non-anchor carrier.
  • the network device not only needs to send additional NRS on some resources, but also needs to send additional CRS on these resources.
  • the network equipment not only the power consumption of the network equipment is wasted, but also the LTE resource scheduling may be affected, thereby causing more interference to other cells.
  • the CRS and the NRS are located on different symbols in a subframe, at this time, both the CRS and the NRS are sent, which is not conducive for the network equipment to power off the symbol-level resources.
  • the terminal device indicates through signaling to determine the existence of CRS in the subframe without NRS.
  • a reference signal receiving and sending method provided by an embodiment of this application includes the following steps:
  • the network device sends first indication information to the terminal device, and the terminal device receives the first indication information from the network device.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate whether there is an NRS on the first resource.
  • the first indication information in the embodiment of this application can be carried by a system information block (SIB) message or a radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) message, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of this application .
  • SIB system information block
  • RRC radio resource control
  • the network device sends second indication information to the terminal device, and the terminal device receives the second indication information from the network device.
  • the second indication information is used to indicate whether there is a CRS on the first resource.
  • the existence condition of the second indication information is that the deployment mode of the non-anchor carrier is in-band same-PCI and the first indication information indicates that there is no NRS.
  • the network device may be A resource sends NRS and CRS to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device can learn that there are NRS and CRS on the first resource according to the first indication information, and then the terminal device receives the NRS and CRS from the network device on the first resource, which is explained here. , I won’t repeat it below.
  • the second indication information in the embodiment of the present application may be carried by a SIB message or an RRC message, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the first indication information and the second indication information in the embodiment of the present application are carried by the same message, or they may be carried by different messages.
  • the carrying mode and bearing location of the first indication information and the second indication information in the embodiment of the present application No specific restrictions.
  • the first indication information and the second indication information may be configured at the carrier level, that is, each carrier is configured with the first indication information and the second indication information; or, the first indication information and the second indication information
  • the second indication information may be configured at the cell level, that is, the first indication information and the second indication information for cell configuration; or, the first indication information may be at the cell level, and the second indication information may be configured at the carrier level; or, It may also be that the first indication information is at the carrier level, and the second indication information may be configured at the cell level, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the network device may only send the CRS to the terminal device on the first resource, and the terminal device may use the first indication information and the second indication information Knowing that there is only CRS on the first resource, and then the terminal device receives the CRS from the network device on the first resource; or, if the second indication information indicates that there is no CRS on the first resource, the network device can neither send NRS on the first resource In addition, CRS cannot be sent, and the terminal device can also learn that there is no CRS and no NRS on the first resource according to the first indication information and the second indication information.
  • the CRS in the case of in-band same-PCI, when the network device needs to send NRS and CRS at the same time, because the NRS is configured, the CRS must be configured, which can be used for Indicate the indication information of the NRS to indicate both NRS and CRS, that is, the network device can indicate that there are NRS and CRS on the first resource through the first indication information; or, the network device can indicate the NRS through the first indication information And the second indication information for indicating the CRS to indicate that there is no NRS and no CRS on the first resource, or only CRS on the first resource. Based on this solution, flexible configuration of CRS and NRS can be realized.
  • the network device can only send CRS on the first resource, which can avoid the need for network devices in the prior art.
  • CRS C-RNTI
  • NRS N-RNTI
  • the embodiment shown in FIG. 16 takes in-band same-PCI as an example for description.
  • the network device can indicate that there are NRS and CRS on the first resource by sending the first indication information.
  • the first indication information indicates that there is no NRS on the first resource, at this time, there is neither NRS and CRS on the first resource.
  • the embodiments of this application do not specifically limit this.
  • the network device first sends the first indication information to the terminal, and then sends the second indication information to the terminal device as an example for illustration.
  • the existence condition of the second indication information is a non-anchor carrier.
  • the deployment mode of is in-band same-PCI and the first indication information indicates that there is no NRS on the first resource.
  • the existence condition of the second indication information does not depend on the content indicated by the first indication information, and the first indication information and the second indication information may exist independently.
  • the network device sends first indication information to the terminal device, the first indication information is used to indicate whether there is an NRS on the first resource; and the network device sends second indication information to the terminal device, and the second indication information is used to indicate the first Whether there is CRS on the resource.
  • first indication information is used to indicate whether there is an NRS on the first resource
  • second indication information is used to indicate the first Whether there is CRS on the resource.
  • the terminal device indicates through signaling to determine whether the reference signal on the first resource is NRS and CRS, or whether the reference signal on the first resource is CRS.
  • another reference signal receiving and sending method provided in an embodiment of this application includes the following steps:
  • the network device sends first indication information to the terminal device, and the terminal device receives the first indication information from the network device.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate whether there is a reference signal on the first resource.
  • the first indication information in the embodiment of the present application may be carried by a SIB message or an RRC message, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the reference signals in the embodiments of the present application include but are not limited to NRS and/or CRS, which are described here in a unified manner, and are not described in detail below.
  • the network device sends second indication information to the terminal device, and the terminal device receives the second indication information from the network device.
  • the second indication information is used to indicate whether there is an NRS on the first resource.
  • the existence condition of the second indication information is that the deployment mode of the non-anchor carrier is in-band same-PCI and the first indication information indicates that there is Reference signal.
  • the network device can neither send NRS nor CRS on the first resource, and the terminal device can also learn from the first indication information There is no reference signal on the first resource, which is explained here in a unified manner, and will not be repeated here.
  • the second indication information in the embodiment of the present application may be carried by a SIB message or an RRC message, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the first indication information and the second indication information in the embodiment of the present application are carried by the same message, or they may be carried by different messages.
  • the carrying mode and bearing location of the first indication information and the second indication information in the embodiment of the present application No specific restrictions.
  • the first indication information and the second indication information may be configured at the carrier level, that is, each carrier is configured with the first indication information and the second indication information; or, the first indication information and the second indication information
  • the second indication information may be configured at the cell level, that is, the first indication information and the second indication information for cell configuration; or, the first indication information may be at the cell level, and the second indication information may be configured at the carrier level; or, It may also be that the first indication information is at the carrier level, and the second indication information may be configured at the cell level, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the CRS since the NRS is configured, the CRS must be configured. Therefore, if the second indication information indicates that there is an NRS on the first resource, the network device can send the NRS on the first resource to the terminal device. And CRS, the terminal device can learn that there are NRS and CRS on the first resource according to the second indication information, and then the terminal device can receive the NRS and CRS from the network device on the first resource; or, if the second indication information indicates the first resource If there is no NRS on the first resource, the network device can send only CRS to the terminal device on the first resource, and the terminal device can learn that there is only CRS on the first resource according to the first indication information and the second indication information, and then the terminal device is on the first resource Receiving the CRS from the network device is described here in a unified manner, and will not be repeated here.
  • the network device when the network device does not need to send a reference signal, it can indicate that there is no reference signal on the first resource through the first indication information; or, When the network device needs to send NRS and CRS at the same time, because it is configured with NRS, it must be configured with CRS, so that it can indicate both NRS and CRS through the indication information used to indicate NRS, that is, the network device can pass the first The first indication information and the second indication information indicate that there are NRS and CRS on the first resource; or, if the network device does not need to send NRS and needs to send CRS, if the second indication information indicates that there is no such resource on the first resource.
  • NRS is equivalent to indicating that there is only a CRS on the first resource, that is, the first indication information and the second indication information may be used to indicate that there is only the CRS on the first resource.
  • flexible configuration of CRS and NRS can be realized.
  • the network device can only send CRS on the first resource, which can avoid the need for network devices in the prior art.
  • it is also necessary to send NRS on these resources resulting in waste of power consumption of network equipment, affecting LTE resource scheduling, and not conducive to various problems such as power shutdown of network equipment for symbol-level resources. .
  • the embodiment shown in FIG. 17 takes in-band same-PCI as an example for description.
  • the network device can indicate that there are NRS and CRS on the first resource by sending the first indication information.
  • the first indication information indicates that there is no reference signal on the first resource, at this time, there is no reference signal on the first resource.
  • NRS and no CRS which are not specifically limited in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the network device first sends the first instruction information to the terminal, and then sends the second instruction information to the terminal device as an example for description.
  • the network device does not need to instruct the terminal device not to send the reference signal, that is, the network device does not need to send the first instruction information to the terminal device, but only needs to send the second instruction information to the terminal device, and the terminal device according to
  • the second indication information learns whether there is an NRS on the first resource. If the second indication information indicates that there is an NRS on the first resource, the terminal device can learn that there are NRS and CRS on the first resource; otherwise, if the second indication information indicates the first resource If there is no NRS, the terminal device can learn that there is only CRS on the first resource.
  • the first step can be to calculate the first resource that should have the NRS, and the NRS is used for the terminal device with good coverage
  • the PDCCH detection is terminated in advance, and the second step is to determine whether to send NRS and CRS on the first resource, or to send only CRS on the first resource (that is, determine whether to send NRS); or, when the terminal device or network device is implemented, the first
  • Whether the first resource is determined first or the type of the reference signal on the first resource is not specifically limited.
  • the first resource may be the time-frequency resource for sending the reference signal in the foregoing embodiment of this application, or it may be other time-frequency resources. This is not specifically limited.
  • the methods and/or steps implemented by the first terminal device can also be implemented by components (such as chips or circuits) that can be used in the first terminal device, and the methods and/or steps implemented by the network device /Or the steps can also be implemented by components that can be used in network devices.
  • an embodiment of the present application also provides a communication device, which is used to implement the foregoing various methods.
  • the communication device may be the first terminal device in the foregoing method embodiment, or a device including the foregoing first terminal device, or a component that can be used in the first terminal device; or, the communication device may be the foregoing method embodiment Network equipment, or a device containing the above-mentioned network equipment, or a component that can be used for network equipment.
  • the communication device includes hardware structures and/or software modules corresponding to each function.
  • the present application can be implemented in the form of hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a certain function is executed by hardware or computer software-driven hardware depends on the specific application and design constraint conditions of the technical solution. Professionals and technicians can use different methods for each specific application to implement the described functions, but such implementation should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.
  • the embodiments of the present application may divide the communication device into functional modules according to the foregoing method embodiments.
  • each functional module may be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions may be integrated into one processing module.
  • the above-mentioned integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware or software functional modules. It should be noted that the division of modules in the embodiments of the present application is illustrative, and is only a logical function division, and there may be other division methods in actual implementation.
  • FIG. 14 shows a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device 140.
  • the terminal device 140 includes a processing module 1401 and a transceiver module 1402.
  • the transceiver module 1402 may also be called a transceiver unit to implement sending and/or receiving functions, for example, it may be a transceiver circuit, transceiver, transceiver or communication interface.
  • the terminal device 140 is applied to a plurality of periods whose period length is a first period length, and the plurality of periods includes a first period and a second period, and both the first period and the second period include M
  • the first duration, the first duration includes N paging opportunities, the location distribution of the paging opportunities in the first period is the same as the location distribution of the paging opportunities in the second period, M is a positive integer, and N is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • the processing module 1401 is configured to determine the first target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first period, where the relative position of the first target paging opportunity in the first period and the second target paging opportunity in the second period The relative positions within are different, the second target paging opportunity is the target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the second cycle, and m is any positive integer less than or equal to M.
  • the processing module 1401 is further configured to determine the time domain resource on the m-th first duration of the first cycle according to the first target paging opportunity, where the time domain resource is a time domain resource among the time-frequency resources used to transmit the reference signal.
  • the transceiver module 1402 is configured to receive reference signals from network devices on time-frequency resources.
  • the processing module 1401 is configured to determine the first target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first cycle, including: determining a first offset, and the first offset is used to indicate the first target The position of the paging opportunity among the N paging opportunities in the m-th first duration of the first period; the first target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first period is determined according to the first offset.
  • the processing module 1401 is configured to determine the first target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first cycle according to the first offset, including: if the first target paging opportunity includes multiple target pagers Yes, determine the first paging opportunity in the first target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first cycle according to the first offset.
  • the transceiver module 1402 is further configured to receive an N-bit bitmap from the network device, and each bit in the bitmap is used to indicate whether each of the N paging opportunities is associated with a reference signal;
  • the processing module 1401 is configured to determine the first target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first cycle according to the first offset, and includes: a method for determining the first cycle according to the bitmap and the first offset The first target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration.
  • the processing module 1401 is configured to determine the first target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first cycle according to the first offset, including: determining the first target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first cycle The index of the paging opportunity; according to the first offset, determine the first target paging opportunity in the m-th first period of the first period from the index of the paging opportunity in the m-th first period of the first period Index: Determine the first target paging opportunity according to the index of the first target paging opportunity.
  • the processing module 1401 is configured to determine the first target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first cycle, which may specifically include: being configured to determine a second parameter value according to R, PO_Index, and N, and the second parameter value It is used to characterize whether the paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first cycle is the first target paging opportunity, where N is the number of paging opportunities in the m-th first duration of the first cycle, and PO_Index is the The index of the paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of a cycle, PO_Index is determined according to the frame number of the paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first cycle; R is based on the m-th of the first cycle The superframe number and frame number where the paging opportunity is located in the first duration are determined.
  • the transceiver module 1402 is configured to receive first indication information from the network device, where the first indication information is used to indicate whether there is a first reference signal on the first resource; the transceiver module 1402 also uses If the processing module 1401 determines that the first indication information indicates that there is no first reference signal on the first resource, it receives second indication information from the network device, where the second indication information is used to indicate whether there is a second reference signal on the first resource.
  • the first reference signal here may be, for example, a narrowband reference signal
  • the second reference signal here may be, for example, a cell reference signal.
  • the transceiver module 1402 is configured to receive first indication information from the network device, where the first indication information is used to indicate whether there is a reference signal on the first resource; the transceiver module 1402 is also configured to: The processing module 1401 determines that the first indication information indicates that there is a reference signal on the first resource, and receives second indication information from the network device, where the second indication information is used to indicate whether the first reference signal is on the first resource.
  • the first reference signal here may be, for example, a narrowband reference signal.
  • the terminal device 140 is presented in the form of dividing various functional modules in an integrated manner.
  • the "module” here can refer to a specific ASIC, circuit, processor and memory that executes one or more software or firmware programs, integrated logic circuit, and/or other devices that can provide the above-mentioned functions.
  • the terminal device 140 may take the form of the terminal device 40 shown in FIG. 3.
  • the processor 401 in the terminal device 40 shown in FIG. 3 may invoke the computer execution instructions stored in the memory 402 to make the terminal device 40 execute the reference signal receiving and sending methods in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the functions/implementation process of the processing module 1401 and the transceiver module 1402 in FIG. 14 may be implemented by the processor 401 in the terminal device 40 shown in FIG. 3 calling the computer execution instructions stored in the memory 402.
  • the function/implementation process of the processing module 1401 in FIG. 14 can be implemented by the processor 401 in the terminal device 40 shown in FIG. 3 calling a computer execution instruction stored in the memory 402, and the function of the transceiver module 1402 in FIG. /The realization process can be realized by the transceiver 403 in the terminal device 40 shown in FIG. 3.
  • the terminal device 140 provided in this embodiment can perform the above-mentioned reference signal receiving and sending methods, the technical effects that can be obtained can refer to the above-mentioned method embodiments, and will not be repeated here.
  • FIG. 15 shows a schematic structural diagram of a network device 150.
  • the network device 150 includes a processing module 1501 and a transceiver module 1502.
  • the transceiver module 1502 may also be referred to as a transceiver unit for implementing sending and/or receiving functions, for example, it may be a transceiver circuit, transceiver, transceiver or communication interface.
  • the network device 150 is applied to a plurality of periods whose period length is the first period length, the plurality of periods include a first period and a second period, and the first period and the second period each include M
  • the first duration, the first duration includes N paging opportunities, the location distribution of the paging opportunities in the first period is the same as the location distribution of the paging opportunities in the second period, M is a positive integer, and N is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • the processing module 1501 is configured to determine the first target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first period, where the relative position of the first target paging opportunity in the first period and the second target paging opportunity in the second period The relative positions within are different, the second target paging opportunity is the target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the second cycle, and m is any positive integer less than or equal to M.
  • the processing module 1501 is further configured to determine the time domain resource on the m-th first duration of the first cycle according to the first target paging opportunity, where the time domain resource is the time domain resource in the time-frequency resource used to transmit the reference signal.
  • the transceiver module 1502 is used to send reference signals to terminal equipment on time-frequency resources.
  • the processing module 1501 is configured to determine the first target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first period, including: determining a first offset, and the first offset is used to indicate the first target The position of the paging opportunity among the N paging opportunities in the m-th first duration of the first period; the first target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first period is determined according to the first offset.
  • the processing module 1501 is configured to determine the first target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first cycle according to the first offset, including: if the first target paging opportunity includes multiple target pagers Yes, determine the first paging opportunity in the first target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first cycle according to the first offset.
  • the transceiver module 1502 is further configured to send an N-bit bitmap to the terminal device, and each bit in the bitmap is used to indicate whether each of the N paging opportunities is associated with a reference signal.
  • the processing module 1501 is configured to determine the first target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first cycle according to the first offset, including: determining the first target paging opportunity in the first cycle according to the bitmap and the first offset The first target paging opportunity in m first durations.
  • the processing module 1501 is configured to determine the first target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first cycle according to the first offset, including: determining the first target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first cycle The index of the paging opportunity; according to the first offset, determine the first target paging opportunity in the m-th first period of the first period from the index of the paging opportunity in the m-th first period of the first period Index: Determine the first target paging opportunity according to the index of the first target paging opportunity.
  • the processing module 1501 is configured to determine the first target paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first cycle, which may specifically include: being configured to determine the second parameter value according to R, PO_Index, and N, and the second parameter value It is used to characterize whether the paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first cycle is the first target paging opportunity, where N is the number of paging opportunities in the m-th first duration of the first cycle, and PO_Index is the The index of the paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of a cycle, PO_Index is determined according to the frame number of the paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first cycle or the frame number at the beginning of the first cycle; R is It is determined according to the superframe number and frame number where the paging opportunity in the m-th first duration of the first period is located, or the frame number at the beginning of the first period and the superframe number where the first period is located.
  • the transceiver module 1502 is configured to send first indication information to the terminal device, where the first indication information is used to indicate whether there is a first reference signal on the first resource; the transceiver module 1502 is also configured to If the processing module 1501 determines that the first indication information indicates that there is no first reference signal on the first resource, it sends second indication information to the terminal device, where the second indication information is used to indicate whether there is a second reference signal on the first resource.
  • the first reference signal here may be a narrowband reference signal NRS, for example
  • the second reference signal here may be a cell reference signal CRS, for example.
  • the transceiver module 1502 is configured to send first indication information to the terminal device, where the first indication information is used to indicate whether there is a reference signal on the first resource; the transceiver module 1502 is also configured to process The module 1501 determines that the first indication information indicates that there is a reference signal on the first resource, and sends second indication information to the terminal device, where the second indication information is used to indicate whether the first reference signal is on the first resource.
  • the first reference signal here may be, for example, a narrowband reference signal NRS.
  • the network device 150 is presented in the form of dividing various functional modules in an integrated manner.
  • the "module” here can refer to a specific ASIC, circuit, processor and memory that executes one or more software or firmware programs, integrated logic circuit, and/or other devices that can provide the above-mentioned functions.
  • the network device 150 may take the form of the network device 30 shown in FIG. 3.
  • the processor 301 in the network device 30 shown in FIG. 3 may invoke the computer execution instructions stored in the memory 302 to make the network device 30 execute the reference signal receiving and sending methods in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the function/implementation process of the processing module 1501 and the transceiver module 1502 in FIG. 15 can be implemented by the processor 301 in the network device 30 shown in FIG. 3 calling a computer execution instruction stored in the memory 302.
  • the function/implementation process of the processing module 1501 in FIG. 15 can be implemented by the processor 301 in the network device 30 shown in FIG. 3 calling a computer execution instruction stored in the memory 302, and the function of the transceiver module 1502 in FIG. 15 /The implementation process can be implemented by the transceiver 303 in the network device 30 shown in FIG. 3.
  • the network device 150 provided in this embodiment can perform the above-mentioned reference signal receiving and sending methods, the technical effects that can be obtained can refer to the above-mentioned method embodiments, which will not be repeated here.
  • an embodiment of the present application further provides a communication device (for example, the communication device may be a chip or a chip system), and the communication device includes a processor for implementing the method in any of the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the communication device further includes a memory.
  • the memory is used to store necessary program instructions and data, and the processor can call the program code stored in the memory to instruct the communication device to execute the method in any of the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the memory may not be in the communication device.
  • the communication device is a chip system, it may be composed of a chip, or may include a chip and other discrete devices, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the computer may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware or any combination thereof.
  • a software program it may be implemented in the form of a computer program product in whole or in part.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions.
  • the computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium.
  • the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server, or data center.
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer, or may include one or more data storage devices such as servers and data centers that can be integrated with the medium.
  • the available medium may be a magnetic medium (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, and a magnetic tape), an optical medium (for example, a DVD), or a semiconductor medium (for example, a solid state disk (SSD)).
  • the computer may include the aforementioned device.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

本申请实施例提供参考信号的接收与发送方法、设备及系统，可以解决现有方案对监听不同寻呼机会的终端设备不公平的问题。该方案应用于包括第一周期和第二周期的多个周期中，第一周期和第二周期均包括M个第一时长，第一时长上包括N个寻呼机会。方案包括：确定第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会，第一目标寻呼机会在第一周期内的相对位置与第二目标寻呼机会在第二周期内的相对位置不同，第二目标寻呼机会为第二周期的第m个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会；根据第一目标寻呼机会确定第一周期的第m个第一时长上的时域资源，该时域资源为用于传输参考信号的时频资源中的时域资源；在该时频资源上接收或发送参考信号。

Description

参考信号接收与发送方法、设备及系统
本申请要求于2019年02月19日提交国家知识产权局、申请号为PCT/CN2019/075499、申请名称为“参考信号接收与发送方法、设备及系统”的PCT专利申请以及于2019年04月29日提交国家知识产权局、申请号为PCT/CN2019/085052、申请名称为“参考信号接收与发送方法、设备及系统”的PCT专利申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。
技术领域
本申请涉及通信领域，尤其涉及参考信号接收与发送方法、设备及系统。
背景技术
在无线通信系统中，终端设备有两种状态，一种是连接态，表示终端设备已与网络设备建立了连接，可直接进行通信；一种是空闲态或称为睡眠态，表示终端设备无法与网络设备直接进行通信。终端设备在没有业务数据发送或者接收时，可以进入空闲态以降低耗电量。当网络设备要向终端设备发送业务数据或者需要终端设备上报一些业务数据时，可以通过寻呼机制通知终端设备，而空闲态的终端设备会定期醒来监听物理下行控制信道(physical downlink control channel，PDCCH)，检测PDCCH中是否存在寻呼调度消息，若存在寻呼调度消息，且是针对自己的寻呼调度，则空闲态的终端设备切换到连接态，以便发送或者接收业务数据。其中，终端设备醒来的位置称为寻呼机会(paging occasion，PO)。
然而，目前的物联网中，有很多业务是主动上报的类型，即以上行为主，寻呼概率较低，因此网络设备在大部分以PO对应的子帧为起始子帧的PDCCH搜索空间中不发送相应的寻呼调度消息，但是终端设备依然需要从该终端设备对应的每个PO处开始监听PDCCH。其中，在以每个PO对应的子帧为起始子帧的PDCCH搜索空间中，终端设备从PDCCH搜索空间的第一个备选位置开始盲检完所有的备选位置才确定没有寻呼调度消息，这对终端设备来说是一种功耗浪费。
基于此，现有技术中，为了让好覆盖的终端设备提前终止PDCCH的检测，网络设备可以在非锚点(non-anchor)载波上向终端设备发送一些窄带参考信号(narrowband reference signal，NRS)。考虑到NRS过多会增加NRS的开销(overhead)，因此网络设备向终端设备发送的NRS可以是与PO的子集有关联的NRS。示例性的，PO的子集例如可以由每N个PO中的第m个PO构成，m为小于或者等于N的正整数，N为正整数。然而，由于不同终端设备监听的PO的位置可能不同，因此该方案会存在对监听不同PO的终端设备不公平的问题。
发明内容
本申请实施例提供参考信号的接收与发送方法、设备及系统，可以解决现有的方案对监听不同PO的终端设备不公平的问题。
为达到上述目的，本申请的实施例采用如下技术方案：
第一方面，提供了一种参考信号的发送方法及相应的通信装置。该方案应用于周 期长度为第一周期长度的多个周期中，该多个周期包括第一周期和第二周期，该第一周期和第二周期均包括M个第一时长，该第一时长上包括N个寻呼机会，该第一周期内寻呼机会的位置分布与该第二周期内寻呼机会的位置分布相同，M为正整数，N为大于1的正整数，该方案包括：网络设备确定该第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会，其中，该第一目标寻呼机会在该第一周期内的相对位置与第二目标寻呼机会在该第二周期内的相对位置不同，该第二目标寻呼机会为该第二周期的第m个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会，m为小于或者等于M的任意正整数；网络设备根据该第一目标寻呼机会确定该第一周期的第m个第一时长上的时域资源，该时域资源为用于传输该参考信号的时频资源中的时域资源；网络设备在该时频资源上向终端设备发送该参考信号。也就是说，该方案中，在non-anchor载波上，当NPDCCH里没有寻呼调度消息时也发送参考信号，且和参考信号关联的第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会在第一周期内的相对位置，与和参考信号关联的第二周期的第m个第一时长中的第二目标寻呼机会在第二周期内的相对位置不同，而从终端设备的视角看，由于每个非连续接收周期中监听一个寻呼机会，不同终端设备监听的寻呼机会的位置可能不同，因此基于该方案，当不同的终端设备监听的寻呼机会不同时，在多个不同的非连续接收周期中，不同的终端设备监听的寻呼机会都有机会在其中一个非连续接收周期中关联参考信号，而非某些终端设备监听的寻呼机会一直没有关联的参考信号，从而该方案对多个终端设备来说更加公平。
在一种可能的设计中，该方案还包括：网络设备确定第一时长上包括N个寻呼机会，N的取值和寻呼配置参数有关，该寻呼配置参数包括不连续接收周期内寻呼机会的个数或者不连续接收周期的长度中的至少一项。
在一种可能的设计中，网络设备确定该第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会，包括：网络设备确定第一偏置量，该第一偏置量用于指示该第一目标寻呼机会在该第一周期的第m个第一时长上的N个寻呼机会中的位置；网络设备根据该第一偏置量确定该第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会。基于该方案，网络设备可以确定出第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会。
在一种可能的设计中，网络设备根据该第一偏置量确定该第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会，包括：若该第一目标寻呼机会中包括多个目标寻呼机会，网络设备根据该第一偏置量确定该第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会中的第一个寻呼机会。基于该方案，基于该方案，在第一目标寻呼机会为多个时，网络设备可以确定出第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会中的第一个寻呼机会，进而网络设备可以获知第一目标寻呼机会中的所有寻呼机会。
在一种可能的设计中，该方案还包括：网络设备向该终端设备发送N位的比特位图，该比特位图中的每个比特分别用于指示该N个寻呼机会中的每个寻呼机会是否关联该参考信号；网络设备根据该第一偏置量确定该第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会，包括：网络设备根据该比特位图和该第一偏置量确定该第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会。基于该方案，网络设备可以确定出第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会。
在一种可能的设计中，网络设备根据该第一偏置量确定该第一周期的第m个第一 时长中的第一目标寻呼机会，包括：网络设备确定第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会的索引(可以用PO_Index进行表征)，该第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会的索引为第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会在第一周期或者参考信号周期内的索引。网络设备根据第一偏置量，从第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会的索引中确定第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会的索引(PO_Index1)；网络设备根据第一目标寻呼机会的索引，确定第一目标寻呼机会。基于该方案，网络设备可以确定出第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会。
在一种可能的实现方式中，网络设备确定第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会，具体可以包括：网络设备根据R、PO_Index和N确定第二参数值，第二参数值用于表征第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会是否为第一目标寻呼机会，其中，N为第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会的个数，PO_Index为第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会的索引，PO_Index是根据第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会所在的帧号或者第一周期开始的帧号确定的；R是根据第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会所在的超帧号和帧号、或者第一周期开始的帧号和第一周期所在的超帧号确定的。基于该方案，网络设备可以确定第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会。
第二方面，提供了一种参考信号的接收方法及相应的通信装置，该方案应用于周期长度为第一周期长度的多个周期中，该多个周期包括第一周期和第二周期，该第一周期和第二周期均包括M个第一时长，该第一时长上包括N个寻呼机会，该第一周期内寻呼机会的位置分布与该第二周期内寻呼机会的位置分布相同，M为正整数，N为大于1的正整数，该方案包括：终端设备确定该第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会，其中，该第一目标寻呼机会在该第一周期内的相对位置与第二目标寻呼机会在该第二周期内的相对位置不同，该第二目标寻呼机会为该第二周期的第m个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会，m为小于或者等于M的任意正整数；终端设备根据该第一目标寻呼机会确定该第一周期的第m个第一时长上的时域资源，该时域资源为用于传输该参考信号的时频资源中的时域资源；终端设备在该时频资源上接收来自网络设备的该参考信号。其中，第二方面所带来的技术效果可参见上述第一方面所带来的技术效果，此处不再赘述。
在一种可能的设计中，该方案还包括：终端设备确定第一时长上包括N个寻呼机会，N的取值和寻呼配置参数有关，该寻呼配置参数包括不连续接收周期内寻呼机会的个数或者不连续接收周期的长度中的至少一项。
在一种可能的设计中，终端设备确定该第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会，包括：终端设备确定第一偏置量，该第一偏置量用于指示该第一目标寻呼机会在该第一周期的第m个第一时长上的N个寻呼机会中的位置；终端设备根据该第一偏置量确定该第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会。
在一种可能的设计中，终端设备根据该第一偏置量确定该第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会，包括：若该第一目标寻呼机会中包括多个目标寻呼机会，终端设备根据该第一偏置量确定该第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会中的第一个寻呼机会。
在一种可能的设计中，该方案还包括：终端设备接收来自该网络设备的N位的比特位图，该比特位图中的每个比特分别用于指示该N个寻呼机会中的每个寻呼机会是否关联该参考信号；终端设备根据该第一偏置量确定该第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会，包括：终端设备根据该比特位图和该第一偏置量确定该第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会。
在一种可能的设计中，终端设备根据该第一偏置量确定该第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会，包括：终端设备确定第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会的索引(可以用PO_Index进行表征)，该第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会的索引为第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会在第一周期或者参考信号周期内的索引。终端设备根据第一偏置量，从第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会的索引中确定第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会的索引(PO_Index1)；终端设备根据第一目标寻呼机会的索引，确定第一目标寻呼机会。基于该方案，终端设备可以确定出第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会。
在一种可能的实现方式中，终端设备确定第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会，具体可以包括：终端设备根据R、PO_Index和N确定第二参数值，第二参数值用于表征第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会是否为第一目标寻呼机会，其中，N为第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会的个数，PO_Index为第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会的索引，PO_Index是根据第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会所在的帧号或者第一周期开始的帧号确定的；R是根据第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会所在的超帧号和帧号、或者第一周期开始的帧号和第一周期所在的超帧号确定的。基于该方案，终端设备可以确定第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会。
其中，第二方面中任一种设计方式所带来的技术效果可参见上述第一方面中不同设计方式所带来的技术效果，此处不再赘述。
结合上述第一方面或第二方面，在一种可能的设计中，该第一偏置量是根据第一参数值、该第一周期长度和该N确定的；其中，该第一参数值是根据该第一周期开始的帧号、或该第一周期所在的超帧号中的一项或多项确定的；或者，该第一参数值是根据该第一周期开始的帧号、或该第一周期所在的超帧号中的一项或多项、以及该参考信号的周期长度确定的。
示例性的，第一偏置量、第一参数值、第一周期长度和N可以满足：第一偏置量＝(第一参数值/第一周期长度)mod(N)，其中，mod表示取余。
结合上述第一方面或第二方面，在一种可能的设计中，该第一偏置量是根据第一参数值和该N确定的；其中，该第一参数值是根据该第一周期开始的帧号、或该第一周期所在的超帧号中的一项或多项、以及该参考信号的周期长度和该第一周期长度确定的。
示例性的，第一偏置量、第一参数值、和N可以满足：第一偏置量＝(第一参数值)mod(N)，其中，mod表示取余。
可选的，该第一偏置量是根据第一参数值和该N确定的，包括：该第一偏置量是根据该第一参数值、该N和伪随机序列确定的。
示例性的，第一偏置量、第一参数值、伪随机序列和N可以满足：第一偏置量＝f(伪随机序列)mod(N)，其中，mod表示取余，该伪随机序列为与该第一参数值相关的伪随机序列，f(伪随机序列)为由该伪随机序列确定的函数。
结合上述第一方面或第二方面，在一种可能的设计中，第二参数值可以满足公式：第二参数值＝(A1+B1*PO_Index+C1*R)mod N，其中，mod表示取余，A1、B1、C1均为整数。
结合上述第一方面或第二方面，在一种可能的设计中，R可以满足公式：R＝floor((SFN 1+1024*H-SFN 1)/T)，其中，SFN 1表示第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会所在的帧号或者第一周期开始的帧号，H-SFN 1表示第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会所在的超帧号或者第一周期所在的超帧号，floor表示向下取整，T表示第一周期。
结合上述第一方面或第二方面，在一种可能的设计中，PO_Index可以满足公式：PO_Index＝(A+(floor((B+SFN 1)*nB/T+C)+i_s)mod(nB)；其中，floor表示向下取整；SFN 1表示第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会所在的帧号或者第一周期开始的帧号；T表示第一周期；A、B、C均为整数；mod表示取余；nB表示寻呼密度；i_s表示第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会所在的子帧号的索引。
结合上述第一方面或第二方面，PO_Index1可以满足公式：(PO_Index1)mod(N)＝第一偏置量。其中，N为第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会的个数。
结合上述第一方面或第二方面，在一种可能的设计中，该第一周期和该第二周期均为非连续接收周期。
第三方面，提供了一种通信装置用于实现上述各种方法。该通信装置可以为上述第二方面、下述第十一方面或下述第十三方面中的终端设备，或者包含上述终端设备的装置；或者，该通信装置可以为上述第一方面、下述第十方面或下述第十二方面中的网络设备，或者包含上述网络设备的装置。所述通信装置包括实现上述方法相应的模块、单元、或手段(means)，该模块、单元、或means可以通过硬件实现，软件实现，或者通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。该硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的模块或单元。
第四方面，提供了一种通信装置，包括：处理器和存储器；该存储器用于存储计算机指令，当该处理器执行该指令时，以使该通信装置执行上述任一方面所述的方法。该通信装置可以为上述第二方面、下述第十一方面或下述第十三方面中的终端设备，或者包含上述终端设备的装置；或者，该通信装置可以为上述第一方面、下述第十方面或下述第十二方面中的网络设备，或者包含上述网络设备的装置。
第五方面，提供了一种通信装置，包括：处理器；所述处理器用于与存储器耦合，并读取存储器中的指令之后，根据所述指令执行如上述任一方面所述的方法。该通信装置可以为上述第二方面、下述第十一方面或下述第十三方面中的终端设备，或者包含上述终端设备的装置；或者，该通信装置可以为上述第一方面、下述第十方面或下述第十二方面中的网络设备，或者包含上述网络设备的装置。
第六方面，提供了一种计算机可读存储介质，该计算机可读存储介质中存储有指令，当其在计算机上运行时，使得计算机可以执行上述或下述任一方面所述的方法。
第七方面，提供了一种包含指令的计算机程序产品，当其在计算机上运行时，使得计算机可以执行上述或下述任一方面所述的方法。
第八方面，提供了一种通信装置(例如，该通信装置可以是芯片或芯片系统)，该通信装置包括处理器，用于实现上述或下述任一方面中所涉及的功能。在一种可能的设计中，该通信装置还包括存储器，该存储器，用于保存必要的程序指令和数据。该通信装置是芯片系统时，可以由芯片构成，也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。
其中，第三方面至第八方面中任一种设计方式所带来的技术效果可参见上述第一方面或第二方面、或下述第十方面至第十三方面中不同设计方式所带来的技术效果，此处不再赘述。
第九方面，提供一种通信系统，该通信系统包括上述方面所述的终端设备和上述方面所述的网络设备；或者，该通信系统包括下述方面所述的终端设备和下述方面所述的网络设备。
第十方面，提供了一种参考信号的发送方法及相应的通信装置，包括：网络设备向终端设备发送第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示第一资源上是否有第一参考信号；若第一指示信息指示第一资源上没有第一参考信号，网络设备向终端设备发送第二指示信息，该第二指示信息用于指示第一资源上是否有第二参考信号。示例性的，这里的第一参考信号例如可以是窄带参考信号NRS，这里的第二参考信号例如可以是小区参考信号CRS。也就是说，本申请实施例中，在in-band same-PCI的情况下，网络设备在需要同时发送第一参考信号以及第二参考信号时，由于配置了第一参考信号的情况下，一定会配置第二参考信号，从而可以通过用于指示第一参考信号的指示信息来同时指示这两个参考信号，也即该网络设备可以通过第一指示信息指示在第一资源上有第一参考信号和第二参考信号；或者，该网络设备可以通过用于指示第一参考信号的第一指示信息和用于指示第二参考信号的第二指示信息来指示在第一资源上没有第一参考信号且没有第二参考信号，或者，在第一资源上仅有第二参考信号。基于该方案，可以实现第一参考信号和第二参考信号的灵活配置。比如，若第一参考信号为NRS，第二参考信号为CRS，则在in-band same-PCI的情况下，网络设备可以在第一资源上仅发送CRS，从而可以避免现有技术中网络设备不仅仅需要在一些资源上额外发送CRS，还需要在这些资源上额外上发送NRS所导致的网络设备的功耗浪费、影响LTE资源调度以及不利于网络设备在针对符号级资源的电源关断等各种问题。
第十一方面，提供了一种参考信号的接收方法及相应的通信装置，包括：终端设备接收来自网络设备的第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示第一资源上是否有第一参考信号；若第一指示信息指示第一资源上没有第一参考信号，终端设备接收来自网络设备的第二指示信息，该第二指示信息用于指示第一资源上是否有第二参考信号。示例性的，这里的第一参考信号例如可以是窄带参考信号，这里的第二参考信号例如可以是小区参考信号。其中，第十一方面的技术效果可参考上述第十方面，在此不再赘述。
第十二方面，提供了一种参考信号的发送方法及相应的通信装置，包括：网络设备向终端设备发送第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示第一资源上是否有参考信号；若第一指示信息指示第一资源上有参考信号，网络设备向终端设备发送第二指示 信息，该第二指示信息用于指示第一资源上是否有第一参考信号。示例性的，这里的第一参考信号例如可以是窄带参考信号NRS。也就是说，本申请实施例中，在in-band same-PCI的情况下，网络设备在不需要发送参考信号时，可以通过第一指示信息指示在第一资源上没有任何参考信号；或者，该网络设备在需要同时发送第一参考信号以及第二参考信号时，由于配置了第一参考信号的情况下，一定会配置第二参考信号，从而可以通过用于指示第一参考信号的指示信息来同时指示这两个参考信号，也即该网络设备可以通过第一指示信息和第二指示信息指示在第一资源上有第一参考信号和第二参考信号；或者，该网络设备在不需要发送第一参考信号且需要发送第二参考信号的情况下，如果第二指示信息指示在第一资源上没有该第一参考信号，则相当于指示该第一资源上仅有第二参考信号，也即可以通过第一指示信息和第二指示信息指示在第一资源上仅有该第二参考信号。基于该方案，可以实现第一参考信号和第二参考信号的灵活配置。比如，若第一参考信号为NRS，第二参考信号为CRS，则在in-band same-PCI的情况下，网络设备可以在第一资源上仅发送CRS，从而可以避免现有技术中网络设备不仅仅需要在一些资源上额外发送CRS，还需要在这些资源上额外上发送NRS所导致的网络设备的功耗浪费、影响LTE资源调度以及不利于网络设备在针对符号级资源的电源关断等各种问题。
第十三方面，提供了一种参考信号的接收方法及相应的通信装置，包括：终端设备接收来自网络设备的第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示第一资源上是否有参考信号；若第一指示信息指示第一资源上有参考信号，终端设备接收来自网络设备的第二指示信息，该第二指示信息用于指示第一资源上是否有第一参考信号。示例性的，这里的第一参考信号例如可以是窄带参考信号NRS。其中，第十三方面的技术效果可参考上述第十二方面，在此不再赘述。
结合上述第十方面至第十三方面中的任一方面，在一种可能的设计中，第一指示信息和第二指示信息为载波级别的指示信息。
结合上述第十方面至第十三方面中的任一方面，在一种可能的设计中，第一指示信息和第二指示信息为小区级别的指示信息。
结合上述第十方面至第十三方面中的任一方面，在一种可能的设计中，第一指示信息为小区级别的指示信息，第二指示信息为载波级别的指示信息。
结合上述第十方面至第十三方面中的任一方面，在一种可能的设计中，第一指示信息为载波级别的指示信息，第二指示信息为小区级别的指示信息。
附图说明
图1a为现有的NB-IOT系统中NPDCCH搜索空间内的检测示意图；
图1b为现有的网络设备上配置的DRX周期内PO位置的示意图；
图1c为现有技术中NB-IOT系统不同nB对应的网络设备上配置的DRX周期内PO位置的示意图；
图1d为现有的超帧与系统帧的关系示意图；
图1e为现有的PO的子集由每N个PO中的第一个PO构成的示意图；
图2为本申请实施例提供的一种通信系统的结构示意图；
图3为本申请实施例提供的终端设备和网络设备的结构示意图；
图4为本申请实施例提供的终端设备的另一种结构示意图；
图5为本申请实施例提供的一种参考信号接收与发送方法；
图6为本申请实施例提供的目标寻呼机会的分布示意图一；
图7为本申请实施例提供的目标寻呼机会的分布示意图二；
图8为本申请实施例提供的目标寻呼机会的分布示意图三；
图9为本申请实施例提供的目标寻呼机会的分布示意图四；
图10为本申请实施例提供的目标寻呼机会的分布示意图五；
图11为本申请实施例提供的目标寻呼机会的分布示意图六；
图12为本申请实施例提供的目标寻呼机会的分布示意图七；
图13为本申请实施例提供的目标寻呼机会的分布示意图八；
图14为本申请实施例提供的终端设备的又一种结构示意图；
图15为本申请实施例提供的网络设备的又一种结构示意图；
图16为本申请实施例提供的另一种参考信号接收与发送方法；
图17为本申请实施例提供的又一种参考信号接收与发送方法。
具体实施方式
为了方便理解本申请实施例的技术方案，首先给出本申请相关技术的简要介绍如下。
第一，PO：
终端设备处于空闲态时，网络设备通过寻呼机制告知终端设备是否需要进入连接态以进行信息交互。在该情况下，终端设备必须监听PDCCH才能完成后续响应。但是，若在空闲态时，终端设备一直监听PDCCH，将对终端设备功耗造成极大的浪费。空闲态下的不连续接收周期(discontinuous reception，DRX)工作机制固定，采用固定的DRX周期，处于降低功耗的考虑，网络设备和终端设备通过协商，终端设备仅在以DRX周期上的一个PO所在的子帧(以下也可以称之为PO位置)为起始子帧的PDCCH搜索空间内以盲检的形式检测PDCCH。其中，PDCCH搜索空间是指目标PDCCH可能出现的备选(candidate)位置的集合，PO位置指示终端设备监听PDCCH的起始位置，从而确定一个PDCCH搜索空间的起始位置，进而根据该PDCCH搜索空间的起始位置盲检PDCCH。在一个PDCCH搜索空间内，一个方块可看做是一个candidate。
需要说明的是，本申请实施例中的PDCCH可以是窄带物联网(narrowband internet of things，NB-IoT)中的窄带PDCCH(narrowband，NPDCCH)，也可以是其它PDCCH，本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。比如如图1a所示，在NB-IOT系统中，NPDCCH搜索空间中最多有八种candidate位置，分别记为candidate0、candidate1、candidate2、……、candidate7。其中，本申请实施例中的备选位置占用h个子帧，h为该备选位置上NPDCCH的重复次数，h为正整数，在此统一说明，以下不再赘述。现有技术中，终端设备在以PO对应的子帧为起始子帧的NPDCCH搜索空间中，依次盲检不同的candidate，直到检测成功为止。如果都不成功，则在下一个DRX周期内，终端设备继续在以PO对应的子帧为起始子帧的NPDCCH搜索空间中监听NPDCCH，以此类推。其中，图1a中的Rmax表示以PO对应的子帧为起始子帧的NPDCCH搜索空间的长度， 也可以理解为NPDCCH的最大重复次数，在此统一说明，以下不再赘述。
其中，本申请实施例中的DRX周期可以是预先配置在终端设备上的，也可以是网络设备通过系统消息配置给该终端设备的，本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。该DRX周期也可以视为空闲态终端设备定期醒来的周期，在此统一说明，以下不再赘述。
如图1b所示，为网络设备上配置的DRX周期内PO位置的示意图。由图1b可以看出，对于网络设备来说，可以在一个DRX周期内配置多个PO。而对于和该网络设备通信的多个终端设备中的任意一个终端设备，该终端设备仅在DRX周期上的一个PO位置处醒来。因此，若配置了DRX，终端设备就需要精确地计算出终端设备在DRX周期内的何时需要醒来，以监听可能发生的寻呼。下面给出终端设备醒来的PO位置的确定方式如下：
其中，PO位置由系统帧号(system frame number，SFN)以及子帧号共同确定，即可以通过SFN以及子帧号来标识PO位置，也就是寻呼调度消息应该出现的NPDCCH搜索空间的起始位置。SFN标识寻呼调度消息应该出现的NPDCCH搜索空间的起始位置所在的系统帧位置，子帧号标识寻呼调度消息应该出现的NPDCCH搜索空间的起始位置在该系统帧上的子帧位置。一个系统帧包括10个子帧，如子帧0、子帧1、子帧2、子帧3、……、子帧8和子帧9，在此统一说明，以下不再赘述。
其中，本申请实施例中，终端设备可以根据网络设备发送的寻呼配置参数确定PO对应的SFN以及子帧号。比如，满足以下公式(a)的SFN即可作为一个PO对应的SFN：
SFN mod T＝(T div N1)*(UEID mod N1)；          公式(a)
其中，mod表示取余；div表示整除，即取整；T表示DRX周期；N1取值等于min(T，nB)，即取T和nB之间的小值，取值范围是{T，T/2，T/4，T/8，T/16，T/32，T/64，T/128，T/256，T/512，T/1024}；nB表示寻呼密度，即一个DRX周期内PO的个数，取值范围是{4T，2T，T，T/2，T/4，T/8，T/16，T/32，T/64，T/128，T/256，T/512，T/1024}；UEID取值等于(国际移动用户识别码(international mobile subscriber identity，IMSI)mod 4096)，其中，每个终端设备的IMSI是唯一的。
比如，一个PO对应的子帧号可以通过以下公式(b)确定：
i_s＝floor(UEID/N1)mod(Ns)；           公式(b)
其中，floor表示向下取整；Ns＝max(1，nB/T)，表示存在PO的系统帧上有多少个PO，取值范围是(4，2，1)；i_s表示子帧号的索引，即计算出i_s之后，可以通过查表方式得到一个PO对应的子帧号；mod、N1和UEID的相关描述可参考上述公式(a)，在此不再赘述。
由上述公式(a)和公式(b)可以看出，一旦T、nB、以及UEID参数确定，终端设备根据上述公式(a)就可在一个DRX周期内唯一确定出一个SFN；终端设备根据上述公式(b)就可在一个系统帧上唯一确定出一个子帧号，从而根据该系统帧号和子帧号，终端设备可以在一个DRX周期内唯一确定出终端设备醒来的一个PO位置。
类似的，对于和网络设备通信的多个终端设备中的任意一个终端设备，网络设备根据上述公式(a)和公式(b)也可以唯一确定出一个DRX周期内该终端设备醒来的一个PO位置，在此不予赘述。
此外，现有技术中，终端设备和网络设备均可以通过上述T、nB、以及UEID参数确定出网络设备在一个DRX周期内配置的所有PO位置。示例性的，如图1c所示，以NB-IOT系统为例，nB＝4T表示一个系统帧内有4个PO，且这4个PO的时域资源分别为子帧0、子帧4、子帧5、子帧9。nB＝2T表示一个系统帧内有2个PO，且这2个PO的时域资源分别为子帧4、子帧9。nB＝T表示一个系统帧内有1个PO，且这1个PO的时域资源为子帧9。nB＝T/2表示两个系统帧内有1个PO，且这1个PO的时域资源为两个系统帧中的其中一个系统帧的子帧9，图1c中示例性的以PO的时域资源为示出的第2个系统帧的子帧9和第4个系统帧的子帧9为例进行说明。nB＝T/4表示四个系统帧内有1个PO，且这1个PO的时域资源为四个系统帧中的其中一个系统帧的子帧9，图1c中示例性的以PO的时域资源为示出的第2个系统帧的子帧9为例进行说明。依次类推。
在目前的NB-IoT系统中，有两种载波类型：锚点(anchor)载波和非锚点(non-anchor)载波。anchor载波是指承载窄带主同步信号(narrowband primary synchronization signal，NPSS)、窄带辅同步信号(narrowband secondary synchronization signal，NSSS)、窄带物理广播信道(narrowband physical broadcast channel，NPBCH)、NPDCCH和窄带物理下行共享信道(narrowband physical downlink shared channel，NPDSCH)的载波。non-anchor载波是指只承载NPDCCH和NPDSCH，不承载NPSS、NSSS和NPBCH的载波。其中，在non-anchor载波上，当终端设备通过以上公式(a)和公式(b)计算出PO位置时，终端设备并不知道以PO对应的子帧为起始子帧的NPDCCH搜索空间中是否有寻呼调度消息，因此终端设备需要盲检NPDCCH。当以PO对应的子帧为起始子帧的NPDCCH搜索空间中有寻呼调度消息时，网络设备会在终端设备能检测到寻呼调度消息的备选位置上发送NRS，以及在检测到寻呼调度消息的备选位置上以及备选位置的第一个子帧的前10个子帧上和备选位置的最后一个子帧的后4个子帧上发送NRS。当以PO对应的子帧为起始子帧的NPDCCH搜索空间中没有寻呼调度消息时，网络设备不会在以上这些位置上发送NRS。
所以，现有技术中，当以PO对应的子帧为起始子帧的NPDCCH搜索空间中没有寻呼调度消息，即使这个终端设备是个信道条件好的终端设备，也需要从PDCCH搜索空间的第一个备选位置开始盲检完所有的备选位置才确定没有寻呼调度消息。然而，信道条件好的终端设备的检测能力强，并不需要检测那么多次重复的NPDCCH才能知道是否有寻呼调度消息，这对信道条件好的终端设备来说是一种功耗浪费。
其中，本申请实施例中，信道条件好的终端设备是指某些指标比较好的终端设备，比如：参考信号接收功率(reference signal received power，RSRP)较好，在此统一说明，以下不再赘述。
第二，金(Gold)序列：
Gold序列为伪随机序列，下面对Gold序列的生成方法进行说明。
Gold序列c(n)的生成方式如下述公式(1)所示：
c(n)＝(x 1(n+N C)+x 2(n+N C))mod 2；         公式(1)
其中，将Gold的长度记为M PN，即n的取值范围为：0，1，……M PN-1，x 1(n+N C)、x 2(n+N C)为生成c(n)的两个序列，N C＝1600，mod()表示取余。
上述的序列x 1(n+N C)可以通过如下公式(2)确定：
x 1(n+31)＝(x 1(n+3)+x 1(n))mod 2；        公式(2)
其中，序列x 1(n+N C)的初始化种子为x 1(0)＝1,x 1(n)＝0,n＝1,2,......30。
上述的序列x 2(n+N C)可以通过如下公式(3)确定：
x 2(n+31)＝(x 2(n+3)+x 2(n+2)+x 2(n+1)+x 2(n))mod 2；       公式(3)
其中，可选的，序列x 2(n+N C)的初始化种子的取值与具体的应用有关，例如在解调参考信号(demodulation reference signal，DMRS)序列的生成中，序列x 2(n+N C)的初始化种子为35。通过公式
Figure PCTCN2019109526-appb-000001
以及C init＝35可以得到序列x 2(n+N C)。
第三，超帧(hyper system frame number，H-SFN)：
在传统(legacy)长期演进(LTE)中，终端设备和网络设备之间同步的时间单位是系统帧(system frame number，SFN)。一个SFN为10ms，SFN取值范围是0-1023，当SFN到达1023后，从0重新开始，即SFN的最大周期就是1024个SFN＝10240ms＝10.24s，因此在legacy LTE中一些周期(比如寻呼周期，connected DRX周期)都比10.24s小。而在窄带物联网(narrow band internet of thing，NB-IoT)中，为了达到省电的目的，显然10.24s不能满足寻呼周期的需要，这时就引入了超帧H-SFN的概念。如图1d所示，一个H-SFN对应1024个SFN，即一个超帧等于10.24s，H-SFN取值范围是0-1023，即H-SFN的最大周期就是1024个H-SFN，对应2.9127小时(hour)。
下面将结合本申请实施例中的附图，对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行描述。其中，在本申请的描述中，除非另有说明，“/”表示前后关联的对象是一种“或”的关系，例如，A/B可以表示A或B；本申请中的“和/或”仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系，表示可以存在三种关系，例如，A和/或B，可以表示：单独存在A，同时存在A和B，单独存在B这三种情况，其中A,B可以是单数或者复数。并且，在本申请的描述中，除非另有说明，“多个”是指两个或多于两个。“以下至少一项(个)”或其类似表达，是指的这些项中的任意组合，包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。例如，a，b，或c中的至少一项(个)，可以表示：a，b，c，a-b，a-c，b-c，或a-b-c，其中a，b，c可以是单个，也可以是多个。另外，为了便于清楚描述本申请实施例的技术方案，在本申请的实施例中，采用了“第一”、“第二”等字样对功能和作用基本相同的相同项或相似项进行区分。本领域技术人员可以理解“第一”、“第二”等字样并不对数量和执行次序进行限定，并且“第一”、“第二”等字样也并不限定一定不同。同时，在本申请实施例中，“示例性的”或者“例如”等词用于表示作例子、例证或说明。本申请实施例中被描述为“示例性的”或者“例如”的任何实施例或设计方案不应被解释为比其它实施例或设计方案更优选或更具优势。确切而言，使用“示例性的”或者“例如”等词旨在以具体方式呈现相关概念，便于理解。
本申请实施例可以适用于LTE系统，如NB-IoT系统中；也可以适用于其他无线通信系统，例如全球移动通信系统(Global System for Mobile Communication，GSM)，移动通信系统(Universal Mobile Telecommunications System，UMTS)，码分多址接入(Code Division Multiple Access，CDMA)系统，宽带码分多址(Wideband Code  Division Multiple Access，WCDMA)以及面向未来的新的网络设备系统等，本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。其中，上述适用本申请的通信系统仅是举例说明，适用本申请的通信系统不限于此，在此统一说明，以下不再赘述。此外，术语“系统”可以和“网络”相互替换。
现有技术中，为了让好覆盖的终端设备提前终止PDCCH的检测，网络设备可以在非锚点(non-anchor)载波上向终端设备发送一些NRS。考虑到NRS过多会增加NRS的开销(overhead)，因此网络设备向终端设备发送的NRS可以是与PO的子集有关联的NRS。如图1e所示，在每个不连续接收(discontinuous reception，DRX)周期中，可能包括多组N个PO，以任意一组N个PO为例，假设PO的子集由每N个PO中的第一个PO构成，则在第一个DRX周期的其中一组N个PO中，仅N个PO中的第一个PO有关联的NRS子帧，其他(N-1)个PO没有关联的NRS子帧。需要说明的是，图1e仅是示例性的以一个PO关联1个NRS子帧为例进行示意，当然，一个PO关联的NRS子帧可能有多个，在此不作具体限定。其中，监听N个PO中每个PO的终端设备(如终端设备1或终端设备2)都通过第一个PO关联的NRS子帧估计用于提前终止NPDCCH的信干燥比(signal to interference plus noise Ratio，SINR)。其他的DRX周期内类似，仅N个PO中的第一个PO有关联的NRS子帧，监听N个PO中每个PO的终端设备(如终端设备1或终端设备2)都通过第一个PO关联的NRS子帧估计用于提前终止NPDCCH的SINR。
然而，该方案会存在对监听不同PO的终端设备不公平的问题。比如，在图1e中，在每个DRX周期中，由于NRS子帧距离终端设备1监听的PO的位置较近，距离终端设备2监听的PO的位置较远，因此终端设备2总需要比终端设备1先醒来测量NRS，从而一方面将浪费终端设备2的功耗，另一方面终端设备2可能会因为不准确的SINR错过寻呼调度消息。也就是说，该方案对终端设备2一直是不公平的。
基于此，如图2所示，为本申请实施例提供的一种通信系统20。该通信系统20包括一个网络设备30，以及与该网络设备30连接的一个或多个终端设备40。可选的，多个终端设备40中的不同终端设备之间可以相互通信。
以网络设备30与任一终端设备40进行交互为例，该方案应用于周期长度为第一周期长度的多个周期中，多个周期包括第一周期和第二周期。第一周期和第二周期均包括M个第一时长，第一时长上包括N个寻呼机会，第一周期内寻呼机会的位置分布与第二周期内寻呼机会的位置分布相同，M为正整数，N为大于1的正整数。其中，网络设备30确定第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会，终端设备40确定第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会，第一目标寻呼机会在第一周期内的相对位置与第二目标寻呼机会在第二周期内的相对位置不同，第二目标寻呼机会为第二周期的第m个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会，m为小于或者等于M的任意正整数。网络设备30根据第一目标寻呼机会确定第一周期的第m个第一时长上的时域资源，终端设备40根据第一目标寻呼机会确定第一周期的第m个第一时长上的时域资源，该时域资源为用于传输参考信号的时频资源中的时域资源。进而，网络设备30在该时频资源上向终端设备40发送参考信号，终端设备40在该时频资源上接收来自网络设备30的参考信号。其中，该方案的具体实现将在后续方法实施例中详细描述， 在此不予赘述。由于本申请实施例中，在non-anchor载波上，当NPDCCH里没有寻呼调度消息时也发送参考信号，且和参考信号关联的第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会在第一周期内的相对位置，与和参考信号关联的第二周期的第m个第一时长中的第二目标寻呼机会在第二周期内的相对位置不同，而从终端设备的视角看，由于每个非连续接收周期中监听一个寻呼机会，不同终端设备监听的寻呼机会的位置可能不同，因此基于该方案，当不同的终端设备监听的寻呼机会不同时，在多个不同的非连续接收周期中，不同的终端设备监听的寻呼机会都有机会在其中一个非连续接收周期中关联参考信号，而非某些终端设备监听的寻呼机会一直没有关联的参考信号，从而该方案对多个终端设备来说更加公平。
可选的，本申请实施例中的网络设备30，是一种将终端设备40接入到无线网络的设备，可以是长期演进(long term evolution，LTE)中的演进型基站(evolutional Node B，eNB或eNodeB)；或者GSM或CDMA中的基站(Base Transceiver Station，BTS)；或者WCDMA系统中的基站(NodeB)；或者第五代(5th generation，5G)网络或者未来演进的公共陆地移动网络(public land mobile network，PLMN)中的基站，宽带网络业务网关(broadband network gateway，BNG)，汇聚交换机或非第三代合作伙伴项目(3rd generation partnership project，3GPP)接入设备等，本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。可选的，本申请实施例中的基站可以包括各种形式的基站，例如：宏基站，微基站(也称为小站)，中继站，接入点等，本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。
可选的，本申请实施例中的终端设备40，可以是用于实现无线通信功能的设备，例如终端或者可用于终端中的芯片等。其中，终端可以是5G网络或者未来演进的PLMN中的用户设备(user equipment，UE)、接入终端、终端单元、终端站、移动站、移动台、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、无线通信设备、终端代理或终端装置等。接入终端可以是蜂窝电话、无绳电话、会话启动协议(session initiation protocol，SIP)电话、无线本地环路(wireless local loop，WLL)站、个人数字处理(personal digital assistant，PDA)、具有无线通信功能的手持设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备、车载设备或可穿戴设备，虚拟现实(virtual reality，VR)终端设备、增强现实(augmented reality，AR)终端设备、工业控制(industrial control)中的无线终端、无人驾驶(self driving)中的无线终端、远程医疗(remote medical)中的无线终端、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线终端、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线终端、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端、智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端等。终端可以是移动的，也可以是固定的。
可选的，本申请实施例中的网络设备30与终端设备40也可以称之为通信装置，其可以是一个通用设备或者是一个专用设备，本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。
可选的，如图3所示，为本申请实施例提供的网络设备30和终端设备40的结构示意图。
其中，终端设备40包括至少一个处理器(图3中示例性的以包括一个处理器401为例进行说明)和至少一个收发器(图3中示例性的以包括一个收发器403为例进行说明)。可选的，终端设备40还可以包括至少一个存储器(图3中示例性的以包括一个存储器402为例进行说明)、至少一个输出设备(图3中示例性的以包括一个输出 设备404为例进行说明)和至少一个输入设备(图3中示例性的以包括一个输入设备405为例进行说明)。
处理器401、存储器402和收发器403通过通信线路相连接。通信线路可包括一通路，在上述组件之间传送信息。
处理器401可以是通用中央处理器(central processing unit，CPU)、微处理器、特定应用集成电路(application-specific integrated circuit，ASIC)，或者一个或多个用于控制本申请方案程序执行的集成电路。在具体实现中，作为一种实施例，处理器401也可以包括多个CPU，并且处理器401可以是单核(single-CPU)处理器或多核(multi-CPU)处理器。这里的处理器可以指一个或多个设备、电路或用于处理数据(例如计算机程序指令)的处理核。
存储器402可以是具有存储功能的装置。例如可以是只读存储器(read-only memory，ROM)或可存储静态信息和指令的其他类型的静态存储设备、随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)或者可存储信息和指令的其他类型的动态存储设备，也可以是电可擦可编程只读存储器(electrically erasable programmable read-only memory，EEPROM)、只读光盘(compact disc read-only memory，CD-ROM)或其他光盘存储、光碟存储(包括压缩光碟、激光碟、光碟、数字通用光碟、蓝光光碟等)、磁盘存储介质或者其他磁存储设备、或者能够用于携带或存储具有指令或数据结构形式的期望的程序代码并能够由计算机存取的任何其他介质，但不限于此。存储器402可以是独立存在，通过通信线路与处理器401相连接。存储器402也可以和处理器401集成在一起。
其中，存储器402用于存储执行本申请方案的计算机执行指令，并由处理器401来控制执行。具体的，处理器401用于执行存储器402中存储的计算机执行指令，从而实现本申请实施例中所述的参考信号接收方法。
或者，可选的，本申请实施例中，也可以是处理器401执行本申请下述实施例提供的参考信号接收方法中的处理相关的功能，收发器403负责与其他设备或通信网络通信，本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。
可选的，本申请实施例中的计算机执行指令也可以称之为应用程序代码或者计算机程序代码，本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。
收发器403可以使用任何收发器一类的装置，用于与其他设备或通信网络通信，如以太网、无线接入网(radio access network，RAN)、或者无线局域网(wireless local area networks，WLAN)等。收发器403包括发射机(transmitter，Tx)和接收机(receiver，Rx)。
输出设备404和处理器401通信，可以以多种方式来显示信息。例如，输出设备404可以是液晶显示器(liquid crystal display，LCD)，发光二级管(light emitting diode，LED)显示设备，阴极射线管(cathode ray tube，CRT)显示设备，或投影仪(projector)等。
输入设备405和处理器401通信，可以以多种方式接受用户的输入。例如，输入设备405可以是鼠标、键盘、触摸屏设备或传感设备等。
网络设备30包括至少一个处理器(图3中示例性的以包括一个处理器301为例进 行说明)、至少一个收发器(图3中示例性的以包括一个收发器303为例进行说明)和至少一个网络接口(图3中示例性的以包括一个网络接口304为例进行说明)。可选的，网络设备30还可以包括至少一个存储器(图3中示例性的以包括一个存储器302为例进行说明)。其中，处理器301、存储器302、收发器303和网络接口304通过通信线路相连接。网络接口304用于通过链路(例如S1接口)与核心网设备连接，或者通过有线或无线链路(例如X2接口)与其它网络设备的网络接口进行连接(图3中未示出)，本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。另外，处理器301、存储器302和收发器303的相关描述可参考终端设备40中处理器401、存储器402和收发器403的描述，在此不再赘述。
结合图3所示的终端设备40的结构示意图，示例性的，图4为本申请实施例提供的终端设备40的一种具体结构形式。
其中，在一些实施例中，图3中的处理器401的功能可以通过图4中的处理器110实现。
在一些实施例中，图3中的收发器403的功能可以通过图4中的天线1，天线2，移动通信模块150，无线通信模块160等实现。
其中，天线1和天线2用于发射和接收电磁波信号。终端设备40中的每个天线可用于覆盖单个或多个通信频带。不同的天线还可以复用，以提高天线的利用率。例如：可以将天线1复用为无线局域网的分集天线。在另外一些实施例中，天线可以和调谐开关结合使用。
移动通信模块150可以提供应用在终端设备40上的包括2G/3G/4G/5G等无线通信的解决方案。移动通信模块150可以包括至少一个滤波器，开关，功率放大器，低噪声放大器(low noise amplifier，LNA)等。移动通信模块150可以由天线1接收电磁波，并对接收的电磁波进行滤波，放大等处理，传送至调制解调处理器进行解调。移动通信模块150还可以对经调制解调处理器调制后的信号放大，经天线1转为电磁波辐射出去。在一些实施例中，移动通信模块150的至少部分功能模块可以被设置于处理器110中。在一些实施例中，移动通信模块150的至少部分功能模块可以与处理器110的至少部分模块被设置在同一个器件中。
无线通信模块160可以提供应用在终端设备40上的包括无线局域网(wireless local area networks，WLAN)(如Wi-Fi网络)，蓝牙(blue tooth，BT)，全球导航卫星系统(global navigation satellite system，GNSS)，调频(frequency modulation，FM)，近距离无线通信(near field communication，NFC)，红外技术(infrared，IR)等无线通信的解决方案。无线通信模块160可以是集成至少一个通信处理模块的一个或多个器件。无线通信模块160经由天线2接收电磁波，将电磁波信号调频以及滤波处理，将处理后的信号发送到处理器110。无线通信模块160还可以从处理器110接收待发送的信号，对其进行调频，放大，经天线2转为电磁波辐射出去。当终端设备40是第一设备时，无线通信模块160可以提供应用在终端设备40上的NFC无线通信的解决方案，是指第一设备包括NFC芯片。该NFC芯片可以提高NFC无线通信功能。当终端设备40是第二设备时，无线通信模块160可以提供应用在终端设备40上的NFC无线通信的解决方案，是指第一设备包括电子标签(如射频识别(radio frequency  identification，RFID)标签)。其他设备的NFC芯片靠近该电子标签可以与第二设备进行NFC无线通信。
在一些实施例中，终端设备40的天线1和移动通信模块150耦合，天线2和无线通信模块160耦合，使得终端设备40可以通过无线通信技术与网络以及其他设备通信。所述无线通信技术可以包括全球移动通讯系统(global system for mobile communications，GSM)，通用分组无线服务(general packet radio service，GPRS)，码分多址接入(code division multiple access，CDMA)，宽带码分多址(wideband code division multiple access，WCDMA)，时分码分多址(time-division code division multiple access，TD-SCDMA)，长期演进(long term evolution，LTE)，BT，GNSS，WLAN，NFC，FM，或IR技术等。所述GNSS可以包括全球卫星定位系统(global positioning system，GPS)，全球导航卫星系统(global navigation satellite system，GLONASS)，北斗卫星导航系统(beidou navigation satellite system，BDS)，准天顶卫星系统(quasi-zenith satellite system，QZSS)或星基增强系统(satellite based augmentation systems，SBAS)。
在一些实施例中，图3中的存储器402的功能可以通过图4中的内部存储器121或者外部存储器接口120连接的外部存储器(例如Micro SD卡)等实现。
在一些实施例中，图3中的输出设备404的功能可以通过图4中的显示屏194实现。其中，显示屏194用于显示图像，视频等。显示屏194包括显示面板。
在一些实施例中，图3中的输入设备405的功能可以通过鼠标、键盘、触摸屏设备或图4中的传感器模块180来实现。示例性的，如图4所示，该传感器模块180例如可以包括压力传感器180A、陀螺仪传感器180B、气压传感器180C、磁传感器180D、加速度传感器180E、距离传感器180F、接近光传感器180G、指纹传感器180H、温度传感器180J、触摸传感器180K、环境光传感器180L、和骨传导传感器180M中的一个或多个，本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。
在一些实施例中，如图4所示，该终端设备40还可以包括音频模块170、摄像头193、指示器192、马达191、按键190、SIM卡接口195、USB接口130、充电管理模块140、电源管理模块141和电池142中的一个或多个，其中，音频模块170可以与扬声器170A(也称“喇叭”)、受话器170B(也称“听筒”)、麦克风170C(也称“话筒”，“传声器”)或耳机接口170D等连接，本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。
可以理解的是，图4所示的结构并不构成对终端设备40的具体限定。比如，在本申请另一些实施例中，终端设备40可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件，或者组合某些部件，或者拆分某些部件，或者不同的部件布置。图示的部件可以以硬件，软件或软件和硬件的组合实现。
下面将结合图2至图4，以图2所示的网络设备30与任一终端设备40进行交互为例，对本申请实施例提供的参考信号接收与发送方法进行展开说明。其中，该方法应用于周期长度为第一周期长度的多个周期中，该多个周期包括第一周期和第二周期。第一周期和第二周期均包括M个第一时长，第一时长上包括N个寻呼机会，第一周期内寻呼机会的位置分布与第二周期内寻呼机会的位置分布相同，M为正整数，N为大于1的正整数。
可选的，本申请实施例中，参数N可以是网络设备配置的，也可以是协议规定的，在此不作具体限定。
可选的，本申请实施例中，参数M可以是网络设备配置的，也可以是协议规定的，在此不作具体限定。
需要说明的是，本申请下述实施例中各个网元之间的消息名字或消息中各参数的名字等只是一个示例，具体实现中也可以是其他的名字，本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。
如图5所示，为本申请实施例提供的一种参考信号接收与发送方法，该参考信号接收与发送方法包括如下步骤：
S501、网络设备确定第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会。
其中，第一目标寻呼机会在第一周期内的相对位置与第二目标寻呼机会在第二周期内的相对位置不同，第二目标寻呼机会为第二周期的第m个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会，m为小于或者等于M的任意正整数。
可选的，本申请实施例中，网络设备确定第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会，具体可以包括：网络设备确定第一偏置量，该第一偏置量用于指示第一目标寻呼机会在第一周期的第m个第一时长上的N个寻呼机会中的位置；网络设备根据第一偏置量确定第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会。
可选的，本申请实施例中的第一目标寻呼机会可以是一个或多个，网络设备根据第一偏置量确定第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会，具体可以包括：若第一目标寻呼机会为一个，网络设备根据第一偏置量确定第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会；或者，若第一目标寻呼机会为多个，网络设备根据第一偏置量确定第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会中的第一个寻呼机会或者最后一个寻呼机会。
或者，可选的，本申请实施例中，网络设备根据第一偏置量确定第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会，具体可以包括：网络设备根据N位的比特位图和第一偏置量确定第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会，其中，N位的比特位图中的每个比特分别用于指示N个寻呼机会中的每个寻呼机会是否关联参考信号。
或者，可选的，本申请实施例中，网络设备根据第一偏置量确定第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会，具体可以包括：网络设备确定第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会的索引(可以用PO_Index进行表征)，该第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会的索引为第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会在第一周期或者参考信号周期内的索引。网络设备根据第一偏置量，从第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会的索引中确定第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会的索引(PO_Index1)；网络设备根据第一目标寻呼机会的索引，确定第一目标寻呼机会。
可选的，本申请实施例中，PO_Index可以是根据第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会所在的帧号确定的。一种可能的实现方式中，PO_Index满足公式：PO_Index＝(A+(floor((B+SFN 1)*nB/T+C)+i_s)mod(nB)；其中，floor表示向下取整；SFN 1表示第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会所在的帧号或者第一周期开始的帧号；T表示第一周期；A、B、C均为整数；mod表示取余；nB和i_s的相关描述可参考上述 公式(a)和公式(b)，在此不再赘述。假设A、B和C的取值均为0，则PO_Index＝(floor(SFN 1*nB/T)+i_s)mod(nB)。其中，SFN 1*nB/T为第一周期内当前SFN 1之前的PO的个数；SFN 1*nB/T+i_s为第一周期内当前SFN 1内i_s对应的PO的索引。这里，nB＝N1*Ns，因此，PO_Index＝(floor(SFN 1*nB/T)+i_s)mod(nB)可变形为PO_Index＝(floor(SFN*N1*Ns/T)+i_s)mod(N1*Ns)。其中，Ns和N1的相关描述可参考上述公式(a)和公式(b)，在此不予赘述。
一种可能的实现方式中，PO_Index1可以满足：(PO_Index1)mod(N)＝第一偏置量。其中，N为第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会的个数。
示例性的，假设第一周期为DRX周期，N＝2，T＝128，nB＝T(一个DRX周期内共128个PO)，H-SFN＝0，Ns＝1，N1＝128，i_s＝0。假设H-SFN 1表示第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会所在的超帧号，SFN 1表示第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会所在的帧号，则对于第一个DRX周期，根据公式(a)确定的SFN 1＝0，1，2…127；对于第二个DRX周期，根据公式(a)确定的SFN 1＝128，129，…，255。
将上述参数代入下述公式(4)和公式(5)可知，对于第一个DRX周期，则第一偏置量＝0。假设A、B和C的取值均为0，则PO_Index＝(floor(SFN 1*nB/T)+i_s)mod(nB)。当SFN 1＝0时，PO_Index＝(floor(0*128/128)+0)mod128＝0，PO_Index mod N＝0 mod 2＝第一偏置量，因此PO_Index为0的寻呼机会为第一目标寻呼机会。当SFN 1＝1时，PO_Index＝(floor(1*128/128)+0)mod128＝1，PO_Index mod N＝1mod 2≠第一偏置量，因此PO_Index为1的寻呼机会不是第一目标寻呼机会。当SFN 1＝2时，PO_Index＝(floor(2*128/128)+0)mod128＝2，PO_Index mod N＝2 mod 2＝第一偏置量，因此PO_Index为2的寻呼机会为第一目标寻呼机会，以此类推。
将上述参数代入下述公式(4)和公式(5)可知，对于第二个DRX周期，则第一偏置量＝1。当SFN 1＝128时，PO_Index＝(floor(128*128/128)+0)mod128＝0，PO_Index mod N＝0 mod 2≠第一偏置量，因此PO_Index为128的寻呼机会不是第一目标寻呼机会。当SFN 1＝129时，PO_Index＝(floor(129*128/128)+0)mod128＝1，PO_Index mod N＝1 mod 2＝第一偏置量，因此PO_Index为128的寻呼机会为第一目标寻呼机会。当SFN 1＝130时，PO_Index＝(floor(130*128/128)+0)mod128＝2，PO_Index mod N＝2 mod 2≠第一偏置量，因此PO_Index为128的寻呼机会不是第一目标寻呼机会，以此类推。
可选的，本申请实施例中，网络设备确定第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会，具体可以包括：网络设备根据R、PO_Index和N确定第二参数值，第二参数值用于表征第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会是否为第一目标寻呼机会，其中，N为第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会的个数，PO_Index为第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会的索引，PO_Index是根据第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会所在的帧号确定的；R是根据第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会所在的超帧号和帧号确定的。比如，当第二参数值＝1时，第二参数值可以表征第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会为第一目标寻呼机会，当第二参数值＝0时，第二参数值可以表征第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会不是第一目标寻呼机会。或者，当第二参数值＝0时，第二参数值可以表征第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会不 是第一目标寻呼机会，当第二参数值＝1时，第二参数值可以表征第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会为目标寻呼机会。
一种可能的实现方式中，第二参数值满足公式：第二参数值＝(A1+B1*PO_Index+C1*R)mod N，其中，mod表示取余，A1、B1、C1均为整数。
一种可能的实现方式中，R满足公式：R＝floor((SFN 1+1024*H-SFN 1)/T)，其中，SFN 1表示第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会所在的帧号或者第一周期开始的帧号，H-SFN 1表示第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会所在的超帧号或者第一周期所在的超帧号，floor表示向下取整，T表示第一周期。
一种可能的实现方式中，PO_Index满足的公式可参考上述方法实施例，在此不再赘述。
示例性的，假设第一周期为DRX周期，N＝2，T＝128，nB＝T(一个DRX周期内共128个PO)，H-SFN＝0，Ns＝1，N1＝128，i_s＝0。假设H-SFN 1表示第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会所在的超帧号，SFN 1表示第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会所在的帧号，则对于第一个DRX周期，根据公式(a)确定的SFN 1＝0，1，2，…，127。
将上述参数代入上述PO_Index和R分别满足的计算公式，假设A1、B1和C1的取值均为0。当SFN 1＝0时，PO_Index＝(floor(0*128/128)+0)mod128＝0，R＝floor((0+1024*0)/128)＝0，第二参数值＝(0+0)mod 2＝0。当SFN 1＝1时，PO_Index＝(floor(1*128/128)+0)mod128＝1，R＝floor((1+1024*0)/128)＝0，第二参数值＝(1+0)mod 2＝1。当SFN 1＝2时，PO_Index＝(floor(2*128/128)+0)mod128＝2，R＝floor((2+1024*0)/128)＝0，第二参数值＝(2+0)mod 2＝0。以此类推，从而可以达到PO_Index为0，1，2，…，127的效果，并计算得到第二参数值依次为0，1，0，1，…，0，1。
或者，示例性的，假设第一周期为DRX周期，N＝2，T＝128，nB＝T/2(一个DRX周期内共64个PO)，H-SFN＝0，Ns＝1，N1＝128，i_s＝0。假设H-SFN 1表示第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会所在的超帧号，SFN 1表示第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会所在的帧号，则对于第一个DRX周期，根据公式(a)确定的SFN＝0，2，4，…，126。
将上述参数代入上述PO_Index和R分别满足的计算公式，假设A1、B1和C1的取值均为0。当SFN 1＝0时，PO_Index＝(floor(0*64/128)+0)mod64＝0，R＝floor((0+1024*0)/128)＝0，第二参数值＝(0+0)mod 2＝0。当SFN 1＝2时，PO_Index＝(floor(2*64/128)+0)mod64＝1，R＝floor((2+1024*0)/128)＝0，第二参数值＝(1+0)mod 2＝1。当SFN 1＝4时，PO_Index＝(floor(4*64/128)+0)mod128＝2，R＝floor((4+1024*0)/128)＝0，第二参数值＝(2+0)mod 2＝0。以此类推，从而可以达到PO_Index为0，1，2，…，63的效果，并计算得到第二参数值依次为0，1，0，1，…，0，1。
S502、网络设备根据第一目标寻呼机会确定第一周期的第m个第一时长上的时域资源，该时域资源为用于传输参考信号的时频资源中的时域资源。
可选的，本申请实施例中的时频资源中的时域资源为用于传输参考信号的时频资源中的时域资源。可选的，该时频资源中的频域资源例如可以是寻呼机会当前所在的时频资源中的频域资源，也就是说，传输该参考信号的时频资源中的频域资源与寻呼 机会当前所在的时频资源中的频域资源可以是同一个频域资源。或者，可选的，该时频资源中的频域资源也可以不是寻呼机会当前所在的时频资源中的频域资源，也就是说，传输该参考信号的时频资源中的频域资源与寻呼机会当前所在的时频资源中的频域资源可以不是同一个频域资源。此时，网络设备可通过第一频域资源指示参数指示给终端设备传输参考信号的时频资源中的频域资源，本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。
S503、终端设备确定第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会。
其中，第一目标寻呼机会的相关描述可参考上述步骤S501，在此不再赘述。
可选的，本申请实施例中，终端设备确定第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会，具体可以包括：终端设备确定第一偏置量，该第一偏置量用于指示第一目标寻呼机会在第一周期的第m个第一时长上的N个寻呼机会中的位置；终端设备根据第一偏置量确定第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会。
可选的，本申请实施例中的第一目标寻呼机会可以是一个或多个，终端设备根据第一偏置量确定第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会，具体可以包括：若第一目标寻呼机会为一个，终端设备根据第一偏置量确定第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会；或者，若第一目标寻呼机会为多个，终端设备根据第一偏置量确定第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会中的第一个寻呼机会或者最后一个寻呼机会。
或者，可选的，本申请实施例中，网络设备可以向终端设备发送N位的比特位图，终端设备可以接收来自网络设备的N位的比特位图。其中，N位的比特位图中的每个比特分别用于指示N个寻呼机会中的每个寻呼机会是否关联参考信号。相应的，终端设备根据第一偏置量确定第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会，具体可以包括：终端设备根据N位的比特位图和第一偏置量确定第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会。
或者，可选的，本申请实施例中，终端设备根据第一偏置量确定第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会，具体可以包括：终端设备确定第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会的索引(可以用PO_Index进行表征)，该第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会的索引为第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会在第一周期或者参考信号周期内的索引。终端设备根据第一偏置量，从第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会的索引中确定第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会的索引(PO_Index1)；终端设备根据第一目标寻呼机会的索引，确定第一目标寻呼机会。
其中，PO_Index和PO_Index1的相关描述可参考上述步骤S501，在此不再赘述。
可选的，本申请实施例中，终端设备确定第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会，具体可以包括：终端设备根据R、PO_Index和N确定第二参数值，第二参数值用于表征第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会是否为第一目标寻呼机会，其中，第二参数值、N、R、PO_Index的相关描述可参考上述步骤S501，在此不再赘述。
S504、终端设备根据第一目标寻呼机会确定第一周期的第m个第一时长上的时域资源，该时域资源为用于传输参考信号的时频资源中的时域资源。
S505、网络设备在该时频资源上向终端设备发送参考信号，终端设备在该时频资 源上接收来自网络设备的参考信号。
可选的，本申请实施例中，若N＝1(即第一时长上仅包括1个寻呼机会)，则终端设备和网络设备可以将该寻呼机会确定为目标寻呼机会，进而根据该寻呼机会确定第一周期的第m个第一时长上的时域资源，该时域资源为用于传输参考信号的时频资源中的时域资源，本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。
其中，在上述步骤S501-S505中：
可选的，本申请实施例中，若设定参考信号的周期长度为X*第一周期长度，则参数N与参数X可以相同，也可以不同，在此不作具体限定。其中，在参考N与参数X相同时，可以不配置参数X，默认参考信号的周期长度等于N*第一周期长度，在此不作具体限定。
可选的，本申请实施例中的第一周期和第二周期可以均为DRX周期。当然，第一周期和第二周期也可以是大于DRX周期或者小于DRX周期的其他周期，本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。
可选的，本申请实施例中的参考信号例如可以是NRS。
可选的，本申请实施例中，与第一目标寻呼机会关联的参考信号子帧可以是一个或多个，本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。
可选的，本申请实施例中的第一偏置量可以是网络设备配置的，也可以是网络设备和终端设备计算得到的，还可以是协议规定的，在此不作具体限定。
一种可能的实现方式中，第一偏置量是根据第一参数值、第一周期长度和N确定的。其中，第一参数值可以是根据第一周期开始的帧号、或第一周期所在的超帧号中的一项或多项确定的；或者，第一参数值可以是根据第一周期开始的帧号、或第一周期所在的超帧号中的一项或多项、以及参考信号的周期长度确定的。
示例性的，第一偏置量、第一参数值、第一周期长度和N可以满足如下公式(4)：
第一偏置量＝(第一参数值/第一周期长度)mod(N)；       公式(4)
其中，mod表示取余。
示例性的，假设第一周期开始的帧号或者第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会所在的帧号记为cycle_start_SFN(可以简称为SFN 1)，第一周期所在的超帧号或者第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会所在的超帧号记为cycle_H-SFN(可以简称为H-SFN 1)。当cycle_start_SFN表示第一周期开始的帧号时，cycle_start_SFN满足：(cycle_start_SFN)mod(T1)＝0，其中，T1为第一周期长度，则第一参数值与cycle_start_SFN或cycle_H-SFN中的一项或多项可以满足如下公式(5)、公式(6)或公式(7)：
第一参数值＝cycle_H-SFN*1024+cycle_start_SFN；      公式(5)
或者，第一参数值＝cycle_start_SFN；         公式(6)
或者，第一参数值＝cycle_H-SFN*1024；         公式(7)
或者，示例性的，假设第一周期开始的帧号记为cycle_start_SFN，第一周期所在的超帧号记为cycle_H-SFN，cycle_start_SFN满足：(cycle_start_SFN)mod(T1)＝0，其中，T1为第一周期长度，则cycle_start_SFN或cycle_H-SFN中的一项或多项、第一参数值、以及参考信号的周期长度(假设记为T2)可以满足如下公式(8)、公式(9) 或公式(10)：
第一参数值＝(cycle_H-SFN*1024+cycle_start_SFN)mod(T2)；  公式(8)
或者，第一参数值＝(cycle_start_SFN)mod(T2)；     公式(9)
或者，第一参数值＝(cycle_H-SFN*1024)mod(T2)；     公式(10)
需要说明的是，考虑到根据公式(4)确定出的第一偏置量可能是小数值，因此本申请实施例中，也可以是第一偏置量满足：第一偏置量＝(floor(第一参数值/第一周期长度))mod(N)，floor表示向下取整，本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。
当然，本申请实施例中，终端设备和网络设备也可以采用上述确定第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会的方式确定第二周期的第m个第一时长中的第二目标寻呼机会，在此不再赘述。
下面结合几个具体示例进行说明。
示例一：
假设本申请实施例中的第一周期和第二周期为DRX周期，DRX周期＝128个系统帧(可以简称为帧)，则一个超帧＝8个DRX周期，这里分别记为第1个DRX周期、第2个DRX周期、……、第s个DRX周期、……、第8个DRX周期，s为正整数。第s个DRX周期开始的帧号记为cycle(s)_start_SFN，如第1个DRX周期开始的帧号记为cycle1_start_SFN。第s个DRX周期所在的超帧号记为cycle(s)_H-SFN，如第1个DRX周期所在的超帧号记为cycle1_H-SFN。这里假设cycle1_H-SFN至cycle8_H-SFN均为0，即第1个DRX周期至第8个DRX周期所在的超帧为第一个超帧，则根据上述公式(5)，可以确定：
第1个DRX周期的参数值1＝cycle1_H-SFN*1024+cycle1_start_SFN＝0；
第2个DRX周期的参数值2＝cycle2_H-SFN*1024+cycle2_start_SFN＝128；
第3个DRX周期的参数值3＝cycle3_H-SFN*1024+cycle3_start_SFN＝256；
第4个DRX周期的参数值4＝cycle4_H-SFN*1024+cycle4_start_SFN＝384；
第5个DRX周期的参数值5＝cycle5_H-SFN*1024+cycle5_start_SFN＝512；
第6个DRX周期的参数值6＝cycle6_H-SFN*1024+cycle6_start_SFN＝640；
第7个DRX周期的参数值7＝cycle7_H-SFN*1024+cycle7_start_SFN＝768；
第8个DRX周期的参数值8＝cycle8_H-SFN*1024+cycle8_start_SFN＝896。
或者，根据上述公式(6)，可以确定：
第1个DRX周期的参数值1＝cycle1_start_SFN＝0；
第2个DRX周期的参数值2＝cycle2_start_SFN＝128；
第3个DRX周期的参数值3＝cycle3_start_SFN＝256；
第4个DRX周期的参数值4＝cycle4_start_SFN＝384；
第5个DRX周期的参数值5＝cycle5_start_SFN＝512；
第6个DRX周期的参数值6＝cycle6_start_SFN＝640；
第7个DRX周期的参数值7＝cycle7_start_SFN＝768；
第8个DRX周期的参数值8＝cycle8_start_SFN＝896。
进一步的，假设第1个DRX周期至第8个DRX周期均包括4个第一时长(即M＝4)，每个第一时长包括4个寻呼机会(即N＝4)，根据上述公式(4)，可以确定：
第1个DRX周期的偏置量1＝((参数值1)/128)mod(4)＝0；
第2个DRX周期的偏置量2＝((参数值2)/128)mod(4)＝1；
第3个DRX周期的偏置量3＝((参数值3)/128)mod(4)＝2；
第4个DRX周期的偏置量4＝((参数值4)/128)mod(4)＝3；
第5个DRX周期的偏置量5＝((参数值5)/128)mod(4)＝0；
第6个DRX周期的偏置量6＝((参数值6)/128)mod(4)＝1；
第7个DRX周期的偏置量7＝((参数值7)/128)mod(4)＝2；
第8个DRX周期的偏置量8＝((参数值8)/128)mod(4)＝3。
假设第一目标寻呼机会为一个：
由于公式(4)中的第一偏置量用于指示第一目标寻呼机会在第一周期的第m个第一时长上的N个寻呼机会中的位置，则以每个DRX周期的第一个第一时长(即m＝1)为例，如图6所示，第1个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第1个寻呼机会。第2个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第2个寻呼机会。第3个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第3个寻呼机会。第4个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第4个寻呼机会。第5个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第1个寻呼机会。第6个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第2个寻呼机会。第7个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第3个寻呼机会。第8个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第4个寻呼机会。
或者，假设第一目标寻呼机会为多个(这里以3个为例进行说明)，公式(4)中的第一偏置量用于指示第一目标寻呼机会中的第一个寻呼机会在第一周期的第m个第一时长上的N个寻呼机会中的位置：
则以每个DRX周期的第一个第一时长(即m＝1)为例，如图7所示，第1个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第1个寻呼机会、第2个寻呼机会和第3个寻呼机会。第2个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第2个寻呼机会、第3个寻呼机会和第4个寻呼机会。第3个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第3个寻呼机会、第4个寻呼机会和第1个寻呼机会。第4个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第4个寻呼机会、第1个寻呼机会和第2个寻呼机会。第5个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第1个寻呼机会、第2个寻呼机会和第3个寻呼机会。第6个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第2个寻呼机会、第3个寻呼机会和第4个寻呼机会。第7个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第3个寻呼机会、第4个寻呼机会和第1个寻呼机会。第8个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第4个寻呼机会、第1个寻呼机会和第2个寻呼机会。
或者，假设第一目标寻呼机会为多个(这里以2个为例进行说明)，公式(4)中 的第一偏置量用于指示第一目标寻呼机会中的最后一个寻呼机会在第一周期的第m个第一时长上的N个寻呼机会中的位置：
则以每个DRX周期的第一个第一时长(即m＝1)为例，如图8所示，第1个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第1个寻呼机会和第4个寻呼机会。第2个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第2个寻呼机会和第1个寻呼机会。第3个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第3个寻呼机会和第2个寻呼机会。第4个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第4个寻呼机会和第3个寻呼机会。第5个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第1个寻呼机会和第4个寻呼机会。第6个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第2个寻呼机会和第1个寻呼机会。第7个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第3个寻呼机会和第2个寻呼机会。第8个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第4个寻呼机会和第3个寻呼机会。
或者，假设N位的比特位图为0110，0表示不关联参考信号，1表示关联参考信号(当然也可以是0表示关联参考信号，1表示不关联参考信号，在此不作具体限定)：
则以每个DRX周期的第一个第一时长(即m＝1)为例，如图9所示，第1个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第2个寻呼机会和第3个寻呼机会。第2个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第3个寻呼机会和第4个寻呼机会。第3个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第4个寻呼机会和第1个寻呼机会。第4个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第1个寻呼机会和第2个寻呼机会。第5个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第2个寻呼机会和第3个寻呼机会。第6个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第3个寻呼机会和第4个寻呼机会。第7个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第4个寻呼机会和第1个寻呼机会。第8个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第1个寻呼机会和第2个寻呼机会。
由于目标寻呼机会关联参考信号，因此由图6至图9可以看出，该示例中，参考信号的周期为4个DRX周期。第一时长上的N个PO中的每个PO在不同的DRX周期内均存在关联的参考信号，而由于终端设备在每个DRX周期中仅监听一个PO，不同终端设备监听的PO的位置不同，因此当不同的终端设备监听的PO不同时，在多个不同的DRX周期中，不同的终端设备监听的PO都有机会在其中一个DRX周期中关联参考信号，而非某些终端设备监听的PO一直没有关联的参考信号，从而该方案对多个终端设备来说更加公平。
该方案对多个终端设备来说更加公平。
示例二：
假设本申请实施例中的第一周期和第二周期为DRX周期，DRX周期＝128个系统帧(可以简称为帧)，则一个超帧＝8个DRX周期，这里分别记为第1个DRX周期、 第2个DRX周期、……、第s个DRX周期、……、第8个DRX周期，s为正整数。第s个DRX周期开始的帧号记为cycle(s)_start_SFN，如第1个DRX周期开始的帧号记为cycle1_start_SFN。第s个DRX周期所在的超帧号记为cycle(s)_H-SFN，如第1个DRX周期所在的超帧号记为cycle1_H-SFN。这里假设cycle1_H-SFN至cycle8_H-SFN均为0，即第1个DRX周期至第8个DRX周期所在的超帧为第一个超帧，参考信号的周期为2个DRX周期＝256帧，则根据上述公式(8)，可以确定：
第1个DRX周期的参数值1＝(cycle1_H-SFN*1024+cycle1_start_SFN)mod(256)＝0；
第2个DRX周期的参数值2＝(cycle2_H-SFN*1024+cycle2_start_SFN)mod(256)＝128；
第3个DRX周期的参数值3＝(cycle3_H-SFN*1024+cycle3_start_SFN)mod(256)＝0；
第4个DRX周期的参数值4＝(cycle4_H-SFN*1024+cycle4_start_SFN)mod(256)＝128；
第5个DRX周期的参数值5＝(cycle5_H-SFN*1024+cycle5_start_SFN)mod(256)＝0；
第6个DRX周期的参数值6＝(cycle6_H-SFN*1024+cycle6_start_SFN)mod(256)＝128；
第7个DRX周期的参数值7＝(cycle7_H-SFN*1024+cycle7_start_SFN)mod(256)＝0；
第8个DRX周期的参数值8＝(cycle8_H-SFN*1024+cycle8_start_SFN)mod(256)＝128。
或者，根据上述公式(9)，可以确定：
第1个DRX周期的参数值1＝(cycle1_start_SFN)mod(256)＝0；
第2个DRX周期的参数值2＝(cycle2_start_SFN)mod(256)＝128；
第3个DRX周期的参数值3＝(cycle3_start_SFN)mod(256)＝0；
第4个DRX周期的参数值4＝(cycle4_start_SFN)mod(256)＝128；
第5个DRX周期的参数值5＝(cycle5_start_SFN)mod(256)＝0；
第6个DRX周期的参数值6＝(cycle6_start_SFN)mod(256)＝128；
第7个DRX周期的参数值7＝(cycle7_start_SFN)mod(256)＝0；
第8个DRX周期的参数值8＝(cycle8_start_SFN)mod(256)＝128。
进一步的，假设第1个DRX周期至第8个DRX周期均包括4个第一时长(即M＝4)，每个第一时长包括4个寻呼机会(即N＝4)，根据上述公式(4)，可以确定：
第1个DRX周期的偏置量1＝((参数值1)/128)mod(4)＝0；
第2个DRX周期的偏置量2＝((参数值2)/128)mod(4)＝1；
第3个DRX周期的偏置量3＝((参数值3)/128)mod(4)＝0；
第4个DRX周期的偏置量4＝((参数值4)/128)mod(4)＝1；
第5个DRX周期的偏置量5＝((参数值5)/128)mod(4)＝0；
第6个DRX周期的偏置量6＝((参数值6)/128)mod(4)＝1；
第7个DRX周期的偏置量7＝((参数值7)/128)mod(4)＝0；
第8个DRX周期的偏置量8＝((参数值8)/128)mod(4)＝1。
假设第一目标寻呼机会为一个：
由于公式(4)中的第一偏置量用于指示第一目标寻呼机会在第一周期的第m个第一时长上的N个寻呼机会中的位置，则以每个DRX周期的第一个第一时长(即m＝1)为例，如图10所示，第1个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第1个寻呼机会。第2个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第2个寻呼机会。第3个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第1个寻呼机会。第4个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第2个寻呼机会。第5个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第1个寻呼机会。第6个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第2个寻呼机会。第7个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第1个寻呼机会。第8个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第2个寻呼机会。
或者，假设第一目标寻呼机会为多个(这里以3个为例进行说明)，公式(4)中的第一偏置量用于指示第一目标寻呼机会中的第一个寻呼机会在第一周期的第m个第一时长上的N个寻呼机会中的位置：
则以每个DRX周期的第一个第一时长(即m＝1)为例，如图11所示，第1个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第1个寻呼机会、第2个寻呼机会和第3个寻呼机会。第2个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第2个寻呼机会、第3个寻呼机会和第4个寻呼机会。第3个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第1个寻呼机会、第2个寻呼机会和第3个寻呼机会。第4个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第2个寻呼机会、第3个寻呼机会和第4个寻呼机会。第5个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第1个寻呼机会、第2个寻呼机会和第3个寻呼机会。第6个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第2个寻呼机会、第3个寻呼机会和第4个寻呼机会。第7个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第1个寻呼机会、第2个寻呼机会和第3个寻呼机会。第8个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第2个寻呼机会、第3个寻呼机会和第4个寻呼机会。
或者，假设第一目标寻呼机会为多个(这里以2个为例进行说明)，公式(4)中的第一偏置量用于指示第一目标寻呼机会中的最后一个寻呼机会在第一周期的第m个第一时长上的N个寻呼机会中的位置：
则以每个DRX周期的第一个第一时长(即m＝1)为例，如图12所示，第1个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第1个寻呼机会和第4个寻呼机会。第2个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第2个寻呼机会和第1个寻呼机会。第3个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长 中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第1个寻呼机会和第4个寻呼机会。第4个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第2个寻呼机会和第1个寻呼机会。第5个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第1个寻呼机会和第4个寻呼机会。第6个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第2个寻呼机会和第1个寻呼机会。第7个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第1个寻呼机会和第4个寻呼机会。第8个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第2个寻呼机会和第1个寻呼机会。
或者，假设N位的比特位图为0110，0表示不关联参考信号，1表示关联参考信号(当然也可以是0表示关联参考信号，1表示不关联参考信号，在此不作具体限定)：
则以每个DRX周期的第一个第一时长(即m＝1)为例，如图13所示，第1个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第2个寻呼机会和第3个寻呼机会。第2个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第3个寻呼机会和第4个寻呼机会。第3个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第2个寻呼机会和第3个寻呼机会。第4个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第3个寻呼机会和第4个寻呼机会。第5个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第2个寻呼机会和第3个寻呼机会。第6个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第3个寻呼机会和第4个寻呼机会。第7个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第2个寻呼机会和第3个寻呼机会。第8个DRX周期中，第1个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会即为4个寻呼机会中的第3个寻呼机会和第4个寻呼机会。
由于目标寻呼机会关联参考信号，因此由图10至图13可以看出，该示例中，参考信号的周期为2个DRX周期。第一时长上的N个PO中的多个PO在不同的DRX周期内均存在关联的参考信号，而由于终端设备在每个DRX周期中仅监听一个PO，不同终端设备监听的PO的位置不同，因此当不同的终端设备监听的PO不同时，在多个不同的DRX周期中，不同的终端设备监听的PO都有机会在其中一个DRX周期中关联参考信号，而非某些终端设备监听的PO一直没有关联的参考信号，从而该方案对多个终端设备来说更加公平。当然，若该示例中，参考信号的周期为4个DRX周期＝512帧，则最终确定的不同DRX周期内目标寻呼机会的分布示意图分别如上述图6至图9所示，即，第一时长上的N个PO中的每个PO在不同的DRX周期内均存在关联的参考信号，在此不再赘述。
示例三：
假设本申请实施例中的第一周期长度＝1个超帧，第t个周期所在的超帧号记为cycle(t)_H-SFN，t为正整数，如第1个周期所在的超帧号记为cycle1_H-SFN，则根据上述公式(7)，可以确定：
第1个周期的参数值1＝cycle1_H-SFN*1024＝0；
第2个周期的参数值2＝cycle2_H-SFN*1024＝1024；
第3个周期的参数值3＝cycle3_H-SFN*1024＝2048；
第4个周期的参数值4＝cycle4_H-SFN*1024＝3072；
第5个周期的参数值5＝cycle5_H-SFN*1024＝4096；
第6个周期的参数值6＝cycle6_H-SFN*1024＝5120；
第7个周期的参数值7＝cycle7_H-SFN*1024＝6144；
第8个周期的参数值8＝cycle8_H-SFN*1024＝7168。
进一步的，假设1个超帧内包括4个第一时长(即M＝4)，每个第一时长包括4个寻呼机会(即N＝4)，根据上述公式(4)，可以确定：
第1个周期的偏置量1＝((参数值1)/1024)mod(4)＝0；
第2个周期的偏置量2＝((参数值2)/1024)mod(4)＝1；
第3个周期的偏置量3＝((参数值3)/1024)mod(4)＝2；
第4个周期的偏置量4＝((参数值4)/1024)mod(4)＝3；
第5个周期的偏置量5＝((参数值5)/1024)mod(4)＝0；
第6个周期的偏置量6＝((参数值6)/1024)mod(4)＝1；
第7个周期的偏置量7＝((参数值7)/1024)mod(4)＝2；
第8个周期的偏置量8＝((参数值8)/1024)mod(4)＝3。
假设第一目标寻呼机会为一个：
由于公式(4)中的第一偏置量用于指示第一目标寻呼机会在第一周期的第m个第一时长上的N个寻呼机会中的位置，则以每个超帧内的第1个第一时长(即m＝1)为例，则目标寻呼机会在每个超帧内的分布示意与图6类似，仅需将图6中的DRX周期替换为这里的周期长度为1个超帧的周期即可，在此不再赘述。
或者，假设第一目标寻呼机会为多个(这里以3个为例进行说明)，公式(4)中的第一偏置量用于指示第一目标寻呼机会中的第一个寻呼机会在第一周期的第m个第一时长上的N个寻呼机会中的位置：
则以每个超帧内的第1个第一时长(即m＝1)为例，则目标寻呼机会在每个超帧内的分布示意与图7类似，仅需将图7中的DRX周期替换为这里的周期长度为1个超帧的周期即可，在此不再赘述。
或者，假设第一目标寻呼机会为多个(这里以2个为例进行说明)，公式(4)中的第一偏置量用于指示第一目标寻呼机会中的最后一个寻呼机会在第一周期的第m个第一时长上的N个寻呼机会中的位置：
则以每个超帧内的第1个第一时长(即m＝1)为例，则目标寻呼机会在每个超帧内的分布示意与图8类似，仅需将图8中的DRX周期替换为这里的周期长度为1个超帧的周期即可，在此不再赘述。
或者，假设N位的比特位图为0110，0表示不关联参考信号，1表示关联参考信号(当然也可以是0表示关联参考信号，1表示不关联参考信号，在此不作具体限定)：
则以每个超帧内的第1个第一时长(即m＝1)为例，则目标寻呼机会在每个超帧内的分布示意与图9类似，仅需将图9中的DRX周期替换为这里的周期长度为1个超帧的周期即可，在此不再赘述。
示例四：
假设本申请实施例中的第一周期长度＝1个超帧，第t个周期所在的超帧号记为 cycle(t)_H-SFN，t为正整数，如第1个周期所在的超帧号记为cycle1_H-SFN，参考信号的周期为2个超帧，则根据上述公式(10)，可以确定：
第1个周期的参数值1＝(cycle1_H-SFN*1024)mod(2048)＝0；
第2个周期的参数值2＝(cycle2_H-SFN*1024)mod(2048)＝1024；
第3个周期的参数值3＝(cycle3_H-SFN*1024)mod(2048)＝0；
第4个周期的参数值4＝(cycle4_H-SFN*1024)mod(2048)＝1024；
第5个周期的参数值5＝(cycle5_H-SFN*1024)mod(2048)＝0；
第6个周期的参数值6＝(cycle6_H-SFN*1024)mod(2048)＝1024；
第7个周期的参数值7＝(cycle7_H-SFN*1024)mod(2048)＝0；
第8个周期的参数值8＝(cycle8_H-SFN*1024)mod(2048)＝1024。
进一步的，假设1个超帧内包括4个第一时长(即M＝4)，每个第一时长包括4个寻呼机会(即N＝4)，根据上述公式(4)，可以确定：
第1个周期的偏置量1＝((参数值1)/1024)mod(4)＝0；
第2个周期的偏置量2＝((参数值2)/1024)mod(4)＝1；
第3个周期的偏置量3＝((参数值3)/1024)mod(4)＝0；
第4个周期的偏置量4＝((参数值4)/1024)mod(4)＝1；
第5个周期的偏置量5＝((参数值5)/1024)mod(4)＝0；
第6个周期的偏置量6＝((参数值6)/1024)mod(4)＝1；
第7个周期的偏置量7＝((参数值7)/1024)mod(4)＝0；
第8个周期的偏置量8＝((参数值8)/1024)mod(4)＝1。
假设第一目标寻呼机会为一个：
由于公式(4)中的第一偏置量用于指示第一目标寻呼机会在第一周期的第m个第一时长上的N个寻呼机会中的位置，则以每个超帧内的第一个第一时长(即m＝1)为例，则目标寻呼机会在每个超帧内的分布示意与图10类似，仅需将图10中的DRX周期替换为这里的周期长度为1个超帧的周期即可，在此不再赘述。当然，若该示例中，参考信号的周期为4个超帧，则最终确定的不同超帧内目标寻呼机会的分布示意图与图6类似，仅需将图6中的DRX周期替换为这里的周期长度为1个超帧的周期即可，在此不再赘述。
或者，假设第一目标寻呼机会为多个(这里以3个为例进行说明)，公式(4)中的第一偏置量用于指示第一目标寻呼机会中的第一个寻呼机会在第一周期的第m个第一时长上的N个寻呼机会中的位置：
则以每个超帧内的第一个第一时长(即m＝1)为例，则目标寻呼机会在每个超帧内的分布示意与图11类似，仅需将图11中的DRX周期替换为这里的周期长度为1个超帧的周期即可，在此不再赘述。当然，若该示例中，参考信号的周期为4个超帧，则最终确定的不同超帧内目标寻呼机会的分布示意图与图7类似，仅需将图7中的DRX周期替换为这里的周期长度为1个超帧的周期即可，在此不再赘述。
或者，假设第一目标寻呼机会为多个(这里以2个为例进行说明)，公式(4)中的第一偏置量用于指示第一目标寻呼机会中的最后一个寻呼机会在第一周期的第m个第一时长上的N个寻呼机会中的位置：
则以每个超帧内的第一个第一时长(即m＝1)为例，则目标寻呼机会在每个超帧内的分布示意与图12类似，仅需将图12中的DRX周期替换为这里的周期长度为1个超帧的周期即可，在此不再赘述。当然，若该示例中，参考信号的周期为4个超帧，则最终确定的不同超帧内目标寻呼机会的分布示意图与图8类似，仅需将图8中的DRX周期替换为这里的周期长度为1个超帧的周期即可，在此不再赘述。
或者，假设N位的比特位图为0110，0表示不关联参考信号，1表示关联参考信号(当然也可以是0表示关联参考信号，1表示不关联参考信号，在此不作具体限定)：
则以每个超帧内的第一个第一时长(即m＝1)为例，则目标寻呼机会在每个超帧内的分布示意与图13类似，仅需将图13中的DRX周期替换为这里的周期长度为1个超帧的周期即可，在此不再赘述。当然，若该示例中，参考信号的周期为4个超帧，则最终确定的不同超帧内目标寻呼机会的分布示意图与图9类似，仅需将图9中的DRX周期替换为这里的周期长度为1个超帧的周期即可，在此不再赘述。
另一种可能的实现方式中，第一偏置量是根据第一参数值和N确定的。其中，第一参数值可以是根据第一周期开始的帧号、或第一周期所在的超帧号中的一项或多项、以及参考信号的周期长度和第一周期长度确定的。
示例性的，第一偏置量、第一参数值和N可以满足如下公式(11)：
第一偏置量＝(第一参数值)mod(N)；          公式(11)
其中，mod表示取余。
示例性的，假设第一周期开始的帧号记为cycle_start_SFN，第一周期所在的超帧号记为cycle_H-SFN，cycle_start_SFN满足：(cycle_start_SFN)mod(T1)＝0，其中，T1为第一周期长度，则cycle_start_SFN或cycle_H-SFN中的一项或多项、第一参数值、以及参考信号的周期长度(假设记为T2)和T1可以满足如下公式(12)、公式(13)或公式(14)：
第一参数值＝(cycle_H-SFN*1024+cycle_start_SFN)mod(T2)/T1；  公式(12)
或者，第一参数值＝(cycle_start_SFN)mod(T2)/T1；         公式(13)
或者，第一参数值＝(cycle_H-SFN*1024)mod(T2)/T1；       公式(14)
当然，本申请实施例中，终端设备和网络设备也可以采用上述确定第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会的方式确定第二周期的第m个第一时长中的第二目标寻呼机会，在此不再赘述。
下面结合几个具体示例进行说明。
示例五：
假设本申请实施例中的第一周期和第二周期为DRX周期，DRX周期＝128个系统帧(可以简称为帧)，则一个超帧＝8个DRX周期，这里分别记为第1个DRX周期、第2个DRX周期、……、第s个DRX周期、……、第8个DRX周期，s为正整数。第s个DRX周期开始的帧号记为cycle(s)_start_SFN，如第1个DRX周期开始的帧号记为cycle1_start_SFN。第s个DRX周期所在的超帧号记为cycle(s)_H-SFN，如第1个DRX周期所在的超帧号记为cycle1_H-SFN。这里假设cycle1_H-SFN至cycle8_H-SFN均为0，即第1个DRX周期至第8个DRX周期所在的超帧为第一个超帧，参考信号的周期为2个DRX周期＝256帧，则根据上述公式(12)，可以确定：
第1个DRX周期的参数值1＝(cycle1_H-SFN*1024+cycle1_start_SFN)mod(256)/128＝0；
第2个DRX周期的参数值2＝(cycle2_H-SFN*1024+cycle2_start_SFN)mod(256)/128＝1；
第3个DRX周期的参数值3＝(cycle3_H-SFN*1024+cycle3_start_SFN)mod(256)/128＝0；
第4个DRX周期的参数值4＝(cycle4_H-SFN*1024+cycle4_start_SFN)mod(256)/128＝1；
第5个DRX周期的参数值5＝(cycle5_H-SFN*1024+cycle5_start_SFN)mod(256)/128＝0；
第6个DRX周期的参数值6＝(cycle6_H-SFN*1024+cycle6_start_SFN)mod(256)/128＝1；
第7个DRX周期的参数值7＝(cycle7_H-SFN*1024+cycle7_start_SFN)mod(256)/128＝0；
第8个DRX周期的参数值8＝(cycle8_H-SFN*1024+cycle8_start_SFN)mod(256)/128＝128。
或者，根据上述公式(13)，可以确定：
第1个DRX周期的参数值1＝(cycle1_start_SFN)mod(256)/128＝0；
第2个DRX周期的参数值2＝(cycle2_start_SFN)mod(256)/128＝1；
第3个DRX周期的参数值3＝(cycle3_start_SFN)mod(256)/128＝0；
第4个DRX周期的参数值4＝(cycle4_start_SFN)mod(256)/128＝1；
第5个DRX周期的参数值5＝(cycle5_start_SFN)mod(256)/128＝0；
第6个DRX周期的参数值6＝(cycle6_start_SFN)mod(256)/128＝1；
第7个DRX周期的参数值7＝(cycle7_start_SFN)mod(256)/128＝0；
第8个DRX周期的参数值8＝(cycle8_start_SFN)mod(256)/128＝1。
进一步的，假设第1个DRX周期至第8个DRX周期均包括4个第一时长(即M＝4)，每个第一时长包括4个寻呼机会(即N＝4)，根据上述公式(11)，可以确定：
第1个DRX周期的偏置量1＝(参数值1)mod(4)＝0；
第2个DRX周期的偏置量2＝(参数值2)mod(4)＝1；
第3个DRX周期的偏置量3＝(参数值3)mod(4)＝0；
第4个DRX周期的偏置量4＝(参数值4)mod(4)＝1；
第5个DRX周期的偏置量5＝(参数值5)mod(4)＝0；
第6个DRX周期的偏置量6＝(参数值6)mod(4)＝1；
第7个DRX周期的偏置量7＝(参数值7)mod(4)＝0；
第8个DRX周期的偏置量8＝(参数值8)mod(4)＝1。
其中，在偏置量确定之后，目标寻呼机会在每个DRX周期内的分布示意可参考图10至图13所示的示例，在此不再赘述。
示例六：
假设本申请实施例中的第一周期长度＝1个超帧，第t个周期所在的超帧号记为cycle(t)_H-SFN，t为正整数，如第1个周期所在的超帧号记为cycle1_H-SFN，参考信号的周期为2个超帧，则根据上述公式(14)，可以确定：
第1个周期的参数值1＝(cycle1_H-SFN*1024)mod(2048)/1024＝0；
第2个周期的参数值2＝(cycle2_H-SFN*1024)mod(2048)/1024＝1；
第3个周期的参数值3＝(cycle3_H-SFN*1024)mod(2048)/1024＝0；
第4个周期的参数值4＝(cycle4_H-SFN*1024)mod(2048)/1024＝1；
第5个周期的参数值5＝(cycle5_H-SFN*1024)mod(2048)/1024＝0；
第6个周期的参数值6＝(cycle6_H-SFN*1024)mod(2048)/1024＝1；
第7个周期的参数值7＝(cycle7_H-SFN*1024)mod(2048)/1024＝0；
第8个周期的参数值8＝(cycle8_H-SFN*1024)mod(2048)/1024＝1。
进一步的，假设1个超帧内包括4个第一时长(即M＝4)，每个第一时长包括4个寻呼机会(即N＝4)，根据上述公式(11)，可以确定：
第1个周期的偏置量1＝(参数值1)mod(4)＝0；
第2个周期的偏置量2＝(参数值2)mod(4)＝1；
第3个周期的偏置量3＝(参数值3)mod(4)＝0；
第4个周期的偏置量4＝(参数值4)mod(4)＝1；
第5个周期的偏置量5＝(参数值5)mod(4)＝0；
第6个周期的偏置量6＝(参数值6)mod(4)＝1；
第7个周期的偏置量7＝(参数值7)mod(4)＝0；
第8个周期的偏置量8＝(参数值8)mod(4)1。
其中，在偏置量确定之后，目标寻呼机会在每个超帧内的分布示意与图10至图13所示的示例类似，仅需将图10至图13中的DRX周期替换为这里的周期长度为1个超帧的周期即可，在此不再赘述。
需要说明的是，本申请实施例中，根据公式(11)确定的第一偏置量也可以理解为第一周期在参考信号的周期内的相对编号，在此统一说明，以下不再赘述。
可选的，本申请实施例中，若第一偏置量、第一参数值和N可以满足上述公式(11)，则在确定第一偏置量时，也可以考虑寻呼帧号，该寻呼帧号例如可以是第一时长中第q个PO所在的寻呼帧，比如q＝1，本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。
可选的，本申请实施例中，第一偏置量是根据第一参数值和N确定的，可以包括：第一偏置量是根据第一参数值、N和伪随机序列确定的。
示例性的，第一偏置量、第一参数值、伪随机序列和N可以满足如下公式(15)：
第一偏置量＝f(伪随机序列)mod(N)；         公式(15)
其中，mod表示取余，伪随机序列为与第一参数值相关的伪随机序列，f(伪随机序列)为由伪随机序列确定的函数。
示例性的，这里的伪随机序列例如可以是Gold序列。
一种可能的实现方式中，本申请实施例中，根据第一参数值确定伪随机序列的方法可以是：用第一参数值初始化伪随机序列，取固定位的伪随机序列的值。例如，可以将Gold序列的初始化种子设定为第一参数值，进而取固定位的伪随机序列的值。
另一种可能是的实现方式中，本申请实施例中，根据第一参数值确定伪随机序列的方法可以是：用固定的数值初始化，取伪随机序列中第一参数值所在位置的值。例如，Gold序列的初始化种子设定为35，进而取伪随机序列中第一参数值所在位置的值。
其中，由于f(伪随机序列)为随机值，因此根据公式(15)得到的第一偏置量为0至(N-1)中的一个随机值。假设不同的周期内对应的第一参数值不同，如第一参数值为当前DRX周期在参考信号周期内的相对编号，则在一个参考信号的周期内，不同DRX周期内，根据f(伪随机序列)得到的值不同，进而根据公式(15)得到的偏置量不同，从而第m个第一时长上的目标寻呼机会的位置不同。由于目标寻呼机会关联参考信号，而终端设备在每个DRX周期中仅监听一个寻呼机会，因此当不同的终端设备监听的寻呼机会不同时，在多个不同的DRX周期中，不同的终端设备监听的寻呼机会都有机会在其中一个DRX周期中关联参考信号，而非某些终端设备监听的寻呼机会一直没有关联的参考信号，从而该方案对多个终端设备来说更加公平。
需要说明的是，本申请上述实施例均是以不同周期内的第m个第一时长上的目标寻呼机会的确定方式为例进行说明。通过上述方式，在同一个周期的不同第一时长上，确定出的目标寻呼机会的相对位置相同。当然，采用其他方式，在同一个周期的不同第一时长上，确定出的目标寻呼机会的相对位置可能不相同，比如，参考信号周期由大量N个PO集合构成，第一偏置量是N个PO集合在参考信号的周期内的相对编号，本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。
可选的，本申请实施例中，第m个第一时长上的时域资源例如可以包括第一目标寻呼机会中的每个寻呼机会对应的子帧、每个寻呼机会对应的子帧之前的X1个子帧、或者每个寻呼机会对应的子帧之后的Y1个子帧中至少一项。X1个子帧可以为每个寻呼机会对应的子帧之前的Z1个子帧内的前X1个(连续)子帧，其中，Z1可以是网络设备通知的，也可以是协议约定的，如，协议约定Z1等于10，Y1个子帧可以为每个寻呼机会对应的子帧连续的后Y1个连续子帧。X1和Y1可以是网络设备通知的，也可以是协议约定的。X1和Y1的和可以与nB的取值有关，nB表示该不连续接收周期内寻呼机会的个数。此外，需要说明的是，本申请实施例中，第一目标寻呼机会中的每个寻呼机会对应的子帧之前的X1个子帧或者每个寻呼机会对应的子帧之后的Y1个子帧可能在第m个第一时长上，也可能不在第m个第一时长上。比如，第一目标寻呼机会中的每个寻呼机会对应的子帧之前的X1个子帧在第m-m1个第一时长上，每个寻呼机会对应的子帧之后的Y1个子帧在第m-m2个第一时长上，m1和m2均为整数，本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。
本申请实施例提供的参考信号接收与发送方法中，在non-anchor载波上，当NPDCCH里没有寻呼调度消息时也发送参考信号，且和参考信号关联的第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会在第一周期内的相对位置，与和参考信号关联的第二周期的第m个第一时长中的第二目标寻呼机会在第二周期内的相对位置不同，而从终端设备的视角看，由于每个非连续接收周期中监听一个寻呼机会，不同终端设备监听的寻呼机会的位置可能不同，因此基于该方案，当不同的终端设备监听的寻呼机会不同时，在多个不同的非连续接收周期中，不同的终端设备监听的寻呼机会都有机会在其中一个非连续接收周期中关联参考信号，而非某些终端设备监听的寻呼机会一 直没有关联的参考信号，从而该方案对多个终端设备来说更加公平。
其中，上述步骤S501至S505中的网络设备的动作可以由图3所示的网络设备30中的处理器301调用存储器302中存储的应用程序代码以指令该网络设备执行，上述步骤S501至S505中的第一终端设备的动作可以由图3所示的终端设备40中的处理器401调用存储器402中存储的应用程序代码以指令该网络设备执行，本实施例对此不作任何限制。
需要说明的是，本申请实施例均是以寻呼机会关联参考信号为例进行说明。当然，也可以采用唤醒信号(wakeup signal，WUS)关联参考信号，此时对应的参考信号的接收与发送方法与上述方法实施例类似，比如可以根据上述确定第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会的方式确定第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标WUS，进而根据第一WUS确定第一周期的第m个第一时长上的时域资源之后，在相应的时频资源上接收或发送参考信号，在此不再赘述。
可选的，本申请实施例中，第m个第一时长上的时域资源例如可以包括第一WUS中的每个WUS的起始子帧、每个WUS的起始子帧之前的X2个子帧、或者每个WUS的起始子帧之后的Y2个子帧中至少一项。X2个子帧可以为每个WUS的起始子帧之前的Z2个子帧内的前X2个(连续)子帧，其中，Z2可以是网络设备通知的，也可以是协议约定的，如，协议约定Z2等于10，Y2个子帧可以为每个WUS的起始子帧连续的后Y2个连续子帧。X2和Y2可以是网络设备通知的，也可以是协议约定的。X2和Y2的和可以与nB的取值有关，nB表示该不连续接收周期内寻呼机会的个数。
可选的，在上述实施例中，可以在一个DRX周期中的PO的子集周围发送NRS，为了解决公平性问题，不同DRX周期中PO的子集(N个PO选一个)是不一样的。那么，如何确定PO的子集，可以和一些寻呼配置参数有关。现有的寻呼配置参数包括寻呼密度(nB)和DRX周期的长度(T)。其中，当寻呼密度(nB)大于第一数值时，N可以大于第二数值，因为此时两个PO距离很近；当寻呼密度(nB)小于第三数值时，N可以小于第四数值，甚至N取值可以为1，因为此时两个PO距离很远，其中，N为正整数。当DRX周期的长度(T)大于第五数值时，比如T大于5.12s，N可以小于第六数值；当DRX周期的长度(T)小于第七数值时，比如T＝1.28s，N可以大于第八数值。当然，N的取值还可以和寻呼密度(nB)和DRX周期的长度(T)都有关系，本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。
可选的，在上述实施例中，不同的PO关联NRS的数量和/或位置可以是不同的，比如，有些PO是PO前关联一定数量的NRS，有些PO是PO以及PO后关联一定数量的NRS，有些PO关联的NRS数量多，有些PO关联的NRS数量少，这种NRS发送方法可以是通过协议写定的，也可以是通过网络配置的，本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。
另一方面，现有的NB-IoT有3种部署模式，包括带内部署(in-band operation)、保护带部署(guard-band operation)和独立部署(stand-alone opetation)。而in-band operation模式，又分为in-band same-物理小区标识(physical cell identities，PCI)和in-band different-PCI。在in-band same-PCI的情况下，NB-IoT系统的终端设备可以假设NB-IoT系统和LTE系统具有相同的PCI，以及可以假设LTE小区参考信号(cell  reference signal，CRS)与NRS具有相同的天线端口数，且可以假设在存在NRS传输的所有NB-IoT下行子帧内LTE CRS总是可以获得的。即在in-band same-PCI的情况下，子帧中有NRS存在的情况下，网络设备就需要在相应的子帧中发送CRS。
现有技术中，为了让好覆盖的终端设备提前终止PDCCH的检测，网络设备可以在非锚点(non-anchor)载波上向终端设备发送一些NRS。此时，在in-band same-PCI的情况下，网络设备不仅仅需要在一些资源上额外发送NRS，还需要在这些资源上额外发送CRS。该情况下，对于网络设备来说，不仅浪费网络设备的功耗，并且可能影响LTE资源调度，从而会对其他小区有更多干扰。而且，由于CRS和NRS在一个子帧中位于不同的符号上，此时，既发送CRS还发送NRS，不利于网络设备在针对符号级资源的电源关断。为解决上述问题，本申请实施例提供如下技术方案。
一种可能的实现方式中，在in-band same-PCI的情况下，终端设备通过信令指示确定没有NRS的子帧中CRS的存在情况。比如，如图16所示，为本申请实施例提供的一种参考信号接收与发送方法，包括如下步骤：
S1601、网络设备向终端设备发送第一指示信息，终端设备接收来自网络设备的第一指示信息。其中，该第一指示信息用于指示第一资源上是否有NRS。
可选的，本申请实施例中的第一指示信息可以通过系统信息块(system information block，SIB)消息或者无线资源控制(radio resource control，RRC)消息承载，本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。
S1602、若第一指示信息指示第一资源上没有NRS，网络设备向终端设备发送第二指示信息，终端设备接收来自网络设备的第二指示信息。其中，该第二指示信息用于指示第一资源上是否有CRS。
也就是说，本申请实施例中，从网络设备的视角看，第二指示信息的存在条件是non-anchor载波的部署模式为in-band same-PCI且第一指示信息指示第一资源上没有NRS。
可选的，由于配置了第一参考信号的情况下，一定会配置第二参考信号，因此，本申请实施例中，若第一指示信息指示第一资源上有NRS，则网络设备可以在第一资源上向终端设备发送NRS和CRS，终端设备可以根据第一指示信息获知第一资源上有NRS和CRS，进而终端设备在第一资源上接收来自网络设备的NRS和CRS，在此统一说明，以下不再赘述。
可选的，本申请实施例中的第二指示信息可以通过SIB消息或者RRC消息承载，本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。此外，本申请实施例中的第一指示信息和第二指示信息通过同一条消息承载，也可以通过不同的消息承载，本申请实施例第一指示信息和第二指示信息的承载方式和承载位置不做具体限定。
可选的，本申请实施例中，第一指示信息和第二指示信息可以是载波级别配置的，即每个载波分别配置第一指示信息和第二指示信息；或者，第一指示信息和第二指示信息可以是小区级别配置的，即小区配置第一指示信息和第二指示信息；或者，也可以是第一指示信息是小区级别的，第二指示信息可以是载波级别配置的；或者，也可以是第一指示信息是载波级别的，第二指示信息可以是小区级别配置的，本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。
其中，本申请实施例中，若第二指示信息指示第一资源上有CRS，则网络设备可以在第一资源上向终端设备仅发送CRS，终端设备可以根据第一指示信息和第二指示信息获知第一资源上仅有CRS，进而终端设备在第一资源上接收来自网络设备的CRS；或者，若第二指示信息指示第一资源上没有CRS，则网络设备在第一资源既不能发送NRS且不能发送CRS，终端设备也可以根据第一指示信息和第二指示信息获知第一资源上没有CRS且没有NRS，在此统一说明，以下不再赘述。
也就是说，本申请实施例中，在in-band same-PCI的情况下，网络设备在需要同时发送NRS以及CRS时，由于配置了NRS的情况下，一定会配置CRS，从而可以通过用于指示NRS的指示信息来同时指示NRS和CRS，也即该网络设备可以通过第一指示信息指示在第一资源上有NRS和CRS；或者，该网络设备可以通过用于指示NRS的第一指示信息和用于指示CRS的第二指示信息来指示在第一资源上没有NRS且没有CRS，或者，在第一资源上仅有CRS。基于该方案，可以实现CRS和NRS的灵活配置，比如，在in-band same-PCI的情况下，网络设备可以在第一资源上仅发送CRS，从而可以避免现有技术中网络设备不仅仅需要在一些资源上额外发送CRS，还需要在这些资源上额外上发送NRS所导致的网络设备的功耗浪费、影响LTE资源调度以及不利于网络设备在针对符号级资源的电源关断等各种问题。
可选的，图16所示的实施例以in-band same-PCI为例进行说明。对于其他部署模式，网络设备可以通过发送第一指示信息指示在第一资源上有NRS和CRS，当第一指示信息指示第一资源上没有NRS时，此时，第一资源上既没有NRS且没有CRS，本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。
可选的，图16所示的实施例以网络设备先向终端发送发送第一指示信息，再向终端设备发送第二指示信息为例进行说明，第二指示信息的存在条件是non-anchor载波的部署模式为in-band same-PCI且第一指示信息指示第一资源上没有NRS。当然，第二指示信息的存在条件不依赖于第一指示信息指示的内容，第一指示信息和第二指示信息可以独立存在。即，网络设备向终端设备发送第一指示信息，第一指示信息用于指示第一资源上是否有NRS；以及，网络设备向终端设备发送第二指示信息，第二指示信息用于指示第一资源上是否有CRS。本申请实施例对该场景不再进行详细阐述。
或者，另一种可能的实现方式中，在in-band same-PCI的情况下，终端设备通过信令指示确定第一资源上的参考信号是NRS和CRS，还是第一资源上的参考信号是CRS。比如，如图17所示，为本申请实施例提供的另一种参考信号接收与发送方法，包括如下步骤：
S1701、网络设备向终端设备发送第一指示信息，终端设备接收来自网络设备的第一指示信息。其中，该第一指示信息用于指示第一资源上是否有参考信号。
可选的，本申请实施例中的第一指示信息可以通过SIB消息或者RRC消息承载，本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。
可选的，本申请实施例中的参考信号包括但不限于NRS和/或CRS，在此统一说明，以下不再赘述。
S1702、若第一指示信息指示第一资源上有参考信号，网络设备向终端设备发送第二指示信息，终端设备接收来自网络设备的第二指示信息。其中，该第二指示信息用 于指示第一资源上是否有NRS。
也就是说，本申请实施例中，从网络设备的视角看，第二指示信息的存在条件是non-anchor载波的部署模式为in-band same-PCI且第一指示信息指示第一资源上有参考信号。
可选的，本申请实施例中，若第一指示信息指示第一资源上没有参考信号，则网络设备在第一资源既不能发送NRS且不能发送CRS，终端设备也可以根据第一指示信息获知第一资源上没有任何参考信号，在此统一说明，以下不再赘述。
可选的，本申请实施例中的第二指示信息可以通过SIB消息或者RRC消息承载，本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。此外，本申请实施例中的第一指示信息和第二指示信息通过同一条消息承载，也可以通过不同的消息承载，本申请实施例第一指示信息和第二指示信息的承载方式和承载位置不做具体限定。
可选的，本申请实施例中，第一指示信息和第二指示信息可以是载波级别配置的，即每个载波分别配置第一指示信息和第二指示信息；或者，第一指示信息和第二指示信息可以是小区级别配置的，即小区配置第一指示信息和第二指示信息；或者，也可以是第一指示信息是小区级别的，第二指示信息可以是载波级别配置的；或者，也可以是第一指示信息是载波级别的，第二指示信息可以是小区级别配置的，本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。
其中，本申请实施例中，由于配置了NRS的情况下，一定会配置CRS，因此，若第二指示信息指示第一资源上有NRS，则网络设备可以在第一资源上向终端设备发送NRS和CRS，终端设备可以根据第二指示信息获知第一资源上有NRS和CRS，进而终端设备可以在第一资源上接收来自网络设备的NRS和CRS；或者，若第二指示信息指示第一资源上没有NRS，则网络设备可以在第一资源上向终端设备仅发送CRS，终端设备可以根据第一指示信息和第二指示信息获知第一资源上仅有CRS，进而终端设备在第一资源上接收来自网络设备的CRS，在此统一说明，以下不再赘述。
也就是说，本申请实施例中，在in-band same-PCI的情况下，网络设备在不需要发送参考信号时，可以通过第一指示信息指示在第一资源上没有任何参考信号；或者，该网络设备在需要同时发送NRS以及CRS时，由于配置了NRS的情况下，一定会配置CRS，从而可以通过用于指示NRS的指示信息来同时指示NRS和CRS，也即该网络设备可以通过第一指示信息和第二指示信息指示在第一资源上有NRS和CRS；或者，该网络设备在不需要发送NRS且需要发送CRS的情况下，如果第二指示信息指示在第一资源上没有该NRS，则相当于指示该第一资源上仅有CRS，也即可以通过第一指示信息和第二指示信息指示在第一资源上仅有该CRS。基于该方案，可以实现CRS和NRS的灵活配置，比如，在in-band same-PCI的情况下，网络设备可以在第一资源上仅发送CRS，从而可以避免现有技术中网络设备不仅仅需要在一些资源上额外发送CRS，还需要在这些资源上额外上发送NRS所导致的网络设备的功耗浪费、影响LTE资源调度以及不利于网络设备在针对符号级资源的电源关断等各种问题。
图17所示的实施例以in-band same-PCI为例进行说明。对于其他部署模式，网络设备可以通过发送第一指示信息指示在第一资源上有NRS和CRS，当第一指示信息指示第一资源上不存在参考信号时，此时，第一资源上既没有NRS且没有CRS，本申请 实施例对此不作具体限定。
可选的，图17所示的实施例以网络设备先向终端发送发送第一指示信息，再向终端设备发送第二指示信息为例进行说明。当然，网络设备也可以不需要向终端设备指示不发送参考信号，也就是说，网络设备可以不需要向终端设备发送第一指示信息，仅需要向终端设备发送第二指示信息，进而终端设备根据第二指示信息获知第一资源上是否有NRS，若第二指示信息指示第一资源上有NRS，终端设备可以获知第一资源上有NRS和CRS；否则，若第二指示信息指示第一资源上没有NRS，终端设备可以获知第一资源上仅有CRS。相关描述可参考图17所示的实施例，本申请实施例对该场景不再进行详细阐述。
可选的，在图16或图17所示的实施例中，终端设备或网络设备在实现时，第一步可以先计算应该有NRS的第一资源，该NRS用于让好覆盖的终端设备提前终止PDCCH的检测，第二步再确定第一资源上是发送NRS和CRS，还是在第一资源上仅发送CRS(即确定是否发送NRS)；或者，终端设备或网络设备在实现时，第一步可以先确定第一资源上是发送NRS和CRS，还是在第一资源上仅发送CRS(即确定是否发送NRS)，第二步再计算应该有NRS的第一资源，本申请实施例对先确定第一资源还是先确定第一资源上的参考信号的类型不作具体限定。
可选的，在图16或图17所示的实施例中，第一资源可以是本申请前述实施例中发送参考信号的时频资源，也可以是其他的时频资源，本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。
可以理解的是，上述实施例中的“*”表示乘法运算，在此统一说明。
可以理解的是，以上各个实施例中，由第一终端设备实现的方法和/或步骤，也可以由可用于第一终端设备的部件(例如芯片或者电路)实现，由网络设备实现的方法和/或步骤，也可以由可用于网络设备的部件实现。
上述主要从各个网元之间交互的角度对本申请实施例提供的方案进行了介绍。相应的，本申请实施例还提供了通信装置，该通信装置用于实现上述各种方法。该通信装置可以为上述方法实施例中的第一终端设备，或者包含上述第一终端设备的装置，或者为可用于第一终端设备的部件；或者，该通信装置可以为上述方法实施例中的网络设备，或者包含上述网络设备的装置，或者为可用于网络设备的部件。可以理解的是，该通信装置为了实现上述功能，其包含了执行各个功能相应的硬件结构和/或软件模块。本领域技术人员应该很容易意识到，结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤，本申请能够以硬件或硬件和计算机软件的结合形式来实现。某个功能究竟以硬件还是计算机软件驱动硬件的方式来执行，取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能，但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。
本申请实施例可以根据上述方法实施例中对通信装置进行功能模块的划分，例如，可以对应各个功能划分各个功能模块，也可以将两个或两个以上的功能集成在一个处理模块中。上述集成的模块既可以采用硬件的形式实现，也可以采用软件功能模块的形式实现。需要说明的是，本申请实施例中对模块的划分是示意性的，仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分，实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式。
比如，以通信装置为上述方法实施例中的终端设备为例。图14示出了一种终端设备140的结构示意图。其中，该终端设备140包括处理模块1401和收发模块1402。所述收发模块1402，也可以称为收发单元用以实现发送和/或接收功能，例如可以是收发电路，收发机，收发器或者通信接口。
一种可能的实现方式中，该终端设备140应用于周期长度为第一周期长度的多个周期中，多个周期包括第一周期和第二周期，第一周期和第二周期均包括M个第一时长，第一时长上包括N个寻呼机会，第一周期内寻呼机会的位置分布与第二周期内寻呼机会的位置分布相同，M为正整数，N为大于1的正整数。
处理模块1401，用于确定第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会，其中，第一目标寻呼机会在第一周期内的相对位置与第二目标寻呼机会在第二周期内的相对位置不同，第二目标寻呼机会为第二周期的第m个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会，m为小于或者等于M的任意正整数。处理模块1401，还用于根据第一目标寻呼机会确定第一周期的第m个第一时长上的时域资源，时域资源为用于传输参考信号的时频资源中的时域资源。收发模块1402，用于在时频资源上接收来自网络设备的参考信号。
可选的，处理模块1401用于确定第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会，包括：用于确定第一偏置量，第一偏置量用于指示第一目标寻呼机会在第一周期的第m个第一时长上的N个寻呼机会中的位置；根据第一偏置量确定第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会。
可选的，处理模块1401用于根据第一偏置量确定第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会，包括：用于若第一目标寻呼机会中包括多个目标寻呼机会，根据第一偏置量确定第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会中的第一个寻呼机会。
可选的，收发模块1402，还用于接收来自网络设备的N位的比特位图，比特位图中的每个比特分别用于指示N个寻呼机会中的每个寻呼机会是否关联参考信号；处理模块1401，用于根据第一偏置量确定第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会，包括：用于根据比特位图和第一偏置量确定第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会。
可选的，处理模块1401用于根据第一偏置量确定第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会，包括：用于确定第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会的索引；根据第一偏置量，从第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会的索引中确定第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会的索引；根据第一目标寻呼机会的索引，确定第一目标寻呼机会。
可选的，处理模块1401用于确定第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会，具体可以包括：用于根据R、PO_Index和N确定第二参数值，第二参数值用于表征第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会是否为第一目标寻呼机会，其中，N为第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会的个数，PO_Index为第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会的索引，PO_Index是根据第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会所在的帧号确定的；R是根据第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会所在的超帧号和帧号确定的。
另一种可能的实现方式中，收发模块1402，用于接收来自网络设备的第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示第一资源上是否有第一参考信号；收发模块1402，还用于若处理模块1401确定第一指示信息指示第一资源上没有第一参考信号，接收来自网络设备的第二指示信息，该第二指示信息用于指示第一资源上是否有第二参考信号。示例性的，这里的第一参考信号例如可以是窄带参考信号，这里的第二参考信号例如可以是小区参考信号。
再一种可能的实现方式中，收发模块1402，用于接收来自网络设备的第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示第一资源上是否有参考信号；收发模块1402，还用于若处理模块1401确定第一指示信息指示第一资源上有参考信号，接收来自网络设备的第二指示信息，该第二指示信息用于指示第一资源上是否有第一参考信号。示例性的，这里的第一参考信号例如可以是窄带参考信号。
其中，上述方法实施例涉及的各步骤的所有相关内容均可以援引到对应功能模块的功能描述，在此不再赘述。
在本实施例中，该终端设备140以采用集成的方式划分各个功能模块的形式来呈现。这里的“模块”可以指特定ASIC，电路，执行一个或多个软件或固件程序的处理器和存储器，集成逻辑电路，和/或其他可以提供上述功能的器件。在一个简单的实施例中，本领域的技术人员可以想到该终端设备140可以采用图3所示的终端设备40的形式。
比如，图3所示的终端设备40中的处理器401可以通过调用存储器402中存储的计算机执行指令，使得终端设备40执行上述方法实施例中的参考信号接收与发送方法。
具体的，图14中的处理模块1401和收发模块1402的功能/实现过程可以通过图3所示的终端设备40中的处理器401调用存储器402中存储的计算机执行指令来实现。或者，图14中的处理模块1401的功能/实现过程可以通过图3所示的终端设备40中的处理器401调用存储器402中存储的计算机执行指令来实现，图14中的收发模块1402的功能/实现过程可以通过图3所示的终端设备40中的收发器403来实现。
由于本实施例提供的终端设备140可执行上述的参考信号接收与发送方法，因此其所能获得的技术效果可参考上述方法实施例，在此不再赘述。
或者，比如，以通信装置为上述方法实施例中的网络设备为例。图15示出了一种网络设备150的结构示意图。其中，该网络设备150包括处理模块1501和收发模块1502。所述收发模块1502，也可以称为收发单元用以实现发送和/或接收功能，例如可以是收发电路，收发机，收发器或者通信接口。
一种可能的实现方式中，该网络设备150应用于周期长度为第一周期长度的多个周期中，多个周期包括第一周期和第二周期，第一周期和第二周期均包括M个第一时长，第一时长上包括N个寻呼机会，第一周期内寻呼机会的位置分布与第二周期内寻呼机会的位置分布相同，M为正整数，N为大于1的正整数。
处理模块1501，用于确定第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会，其中，第一目标寻呼机会在第一周期内的相对位置与第二目标寻呼机会在第二周期内的相对位置不同，第二目标寻呼机会为第二周期的第m个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会，m为小于或者等于M的任意正整数。处理模块1501，还用于根据第一目标寻呼机会 确定第一周期的第m个第一时长上的时域资源，时域资源为用于传输参考信号的时频资源中的时域资源。收发模块1502，用于在时频资源上向终端设备发送参考信号。
可选的，处理模块1501用于确定第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会，包括：用于确定第一偏置量，第一偏置量用于指示第一目标寻呼机会在第一周期的第m个第一时长上的N个寻呼机会中的位置；根据第一偏置量确定第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会。
可选的，处理模块1501用于根据第一偏置量确定第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会，包括：用于若第一目标寻呼机会中包括多个目标寻呼机会，根据第一偏置量确定第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会中的第一个寻呼机会。
可选的，收发模块1502，还用于向终端设备发送N位的比特位图，比特位图中的每个比特分别用于指示N个寻呼机会中的每个寻呼机会是否关联参考信号。处理模块1501用于根据第一偏置量确定第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会，包括：用于根据比特位图和第一偏置量确定第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会。
可选的，处理模块1501用于根据第一偏置量确定第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会，包括：用于确定第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会的索引；根据第一偏置量，从第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会的索引中确定第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会的索引；根据第一目标寻呼机会的索引，确定第一目标寻呼机会。
可选的，处理模块1501用于确定第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会，具体可以包括：用于根据R、PO_Index和N确定第二参数值，第二参数值用于表征第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会是否为第一目标寻呼机会，其中，N为第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会的个数，PO_Index为第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会的索引，PO_Index是根据第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会所在的帧号或者第一周期开始的帧号确定的；R是根据第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会所在的超帧号和帧号、或者第一周期开始的帧号和第一周期所在的超帧号确定的。
另一种可能的实现方式中，收发模块1502，用于向终端设备发送第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示第一资源上是否有第一参考信号；收发模块1502，还用于若处理模块1501确定第一指示信息指示第一资源上没有第一参考信号，向终端设备发送第二指示信息，该第二指示信息用于指示第一资源上是否有第二参考信号。示例性的，这里的第一参考信号例如可以是窄带参考信号NRS，这里的第二参考信号例如可以是小区参考信号CRS。
又一种可能的实现方式中，收发模块1502，用于向终端设备发送第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示第一资源上是否有参考信号；收发模块1502，还用于若处理模块1501确定第一指示信息指示第一资源上有参考信号，向终端设备发送第二指示信息，该第二指示信息用于指示第一资源上是否有第一参考信号。示例性的，这里的第一参考信号例如可以是窄带参考信号NRS。
其中，上述方法实施例涉及的各步骤的所有相关内容均可以援引到对应功能模块的功能描述，在此不再赘述。
在本实施例中，该网络设备150以采用集成的方式划分各个功能模块的形式来呈现。这里的“模块”可以指特定ASIC，电路，执行一个或多个软件或固件程序的处理器和存储器，集成逻辑电路，和/或其他可以提供上述功能的器件。在一个简单的实施例中，本领域的技术人员可以想到该网络设备150可以采用图3所示的网络设备30的形式。
比如，图3所示的网络设备30中的处理器301可以通过调用存储器302中存储的计算机执行指令，使得网络设备30执行上述方法实施例中的参考信号接收与发送方法。
具体的，图15中的处理模块1501和收发模块1502的功能/实现过程可以通过图3所示的网络设备30中的处理器301调用存储器302中存储的计算机执行指令来实现。或者，图15中的处理模块1501的功能/实现过程可以通过图3所示的网络设备30中的处理器301调用存储器302中存储的计算机执行指令来实现，图15中的收发模块1502的功能/实现过程可以通过图3所示的网络设备30中的收发器303来实现。
由于本实施例提供的网络设备150可执行上述的参考信号接收与发送方法，因此其所能获得的技术效果可参考上述方法实施例，在此不再赘述。
可选的，本申请实施例还提供了一种通信装置(例如，该通信装置可以是芯片或芯片系统)，该通信装置包括处理器，用于实现上述任一方法实施例中的方法。在一种可能的设计中，该通信装置还包括存储器。该存储器，用于保存必要的程序指令和数据，处理器可以调用存储器中存储的程序代码以指令该通信装置执行上述任一方法实施例中的方法。当然，存储器也可以不在该通信装置中。该通信装置是芯片系统时，可以由芯片构成，也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件，本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。
在上述实施例中，可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件程序实现时，可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式来实现。该计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行计算机程序指令时，全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中，或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输，例如，所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或者数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(digital subscriber line，DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可以用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质(例如，软盘、硬盘、磁带)，光介质(例如，DVD)、或者半导体介质(例如固态硬盘(solid state disk，SSD))等。本申请实施例中,计算机可以包括前面所述的装置。
尽管在此结合各实施例对本申请进行了描述，然而，在实施所要求保护的本申请过程中，本领域技术人员通过查看所述附图、公开内容、以及所附权利要求书，可理解并实现所述公开实施例的其他变化。在权利要求中，“包括”(comprising)一词不 排除其他组成部分或步骤，“一”或“一个”不排除多个的情况。单个处理器或其他单元可以实现权利要求中列举的若干项功能。相互不同的从属权利要求中记载了某些措施，但这并不表示这些措施不能组合起来产生良好的效果。
尽管结合具体特征及其实施例对本申请进行了描述，显而易见的，在不脱离本申请的精神和范围的情况下，可对其进行各种修改和组合。相应地，本说明书和附图仅仅是所附权利要求所界定的本申请的示例性说明，且视为已覆盖本申请范围内的任意和所有修改、变化、组合或等同物。显然，本领域的技术人员可以对本申请进行各种改动和变型而不脱离本申请的精神和范围。这样，倘若本申请的这些修改和变型属于本申请权利要求及其等同技术的范围之内，则本申请也意图包含这些改动和变型在内。

Claims (38)

  1. 一种参考信号的发送方法，其特征在于，所述方法应用于周期长度为第一周期长度的多个周期中，所述多个周期包括第一周期和第二周期，所述第一周期和第二周期均包括M个第一时长，所述第一时长上包括N个寻呼机会，所述第一周期内寻呼机会的位置分布与所述第二周期内寻呼机会的位置分布相同，M为正整数，N为大于1的正整数，所述方法包括：
    网络设备确定所述第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会，其中，所述第一目标寻呼机会在所述第一周期内的相对位置与第二目标寻呼机会在所述第二周期内的相对位置不同，所述第二目标寻呼机会为所述第二周期的第m个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会，m为小于或者等于M的任意正整数；
    所述网络设备根据所述第一目标寻呼机会确定所述第一周期的第m个第一时长上的时域资源，所述时域资源为用于传输所述参考信号的时频资源中的时域资源；
    所述网络设备在所述时频资源上向终端设备发送所述参考信号。
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述网络设备确定所述第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会，包括：
    所述网络设备确定第一偏置量，所述第一偏置量用于指示所述第一目标寻呼机会在所述第一周期的第m个第一时长上的N个寻呼机会中的位置；
    所述网络设备根据所述第一偏置量确定所述第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会。
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述网络设备根据所述第一偏置量确定所述第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会，包括：
    若所述第一目标寻呼机会中包括多个目标寻呼机会，所述网络设备根据所述第一偏置量确定所述第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会中的第一个寻呼机会。
  4. 根据权利要求2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送N位的比特位图，所述比特位图中的每个比特分别用于指示所述N个寻呼机会中的每个寻呼机会是否关联所述参考信号；
    所述网络设备根据所述第一偏置量确定所述第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会，包括：
    所述网络设备根据所述比特位图和所述第一偏置量确定所述第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会。
  5. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述网络设备确定所述第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会，包括：
    所述网络设备根据R、PO_Index和N确定第二参数值，所述第二参数值用于表征所述第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会是否为所述第一目标寻呼机会，其中，N为所述第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会的个数，PO_Index为所述第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会的索引，PO_Index是根据所述第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会所在的帧号或者所述第一周期开始的帧号确定的；R是根据所述第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会所在的超帧号和帧号、或者所述第一周期开 始的帧号和所述第一周期所在的超帧号确定的。
  6. 一种参考信号的接收方法，其特征在于，所述方法应用于周期长度为第一周期长度的多个周期中，所述多个周期包括第一周期和第二周期，所述第一周期和第二周期均包括M个第一时长，所述第一时长上包括N个寻呼机会，所述第一周期内寻呼机会的位置分布与所述第二周期内寻呼机会的位置分布相同，M为正整数，N为大于1的正整数，所述方法包括：
    终端设备确定所述第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会，其中，所述第一目标寻呼机会在所述第一周期内的相对位置与第二目标寻呼机会在所述第二周期内的相对位置不同，所述第二目标寻呼机会为所述第二周期的第m个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会，m为小于或者等于M的任意正整数；
    所述终端设备根据所述第一目标寻呼机会确定所述第一周期的第m个第一时长上的时域资源，所述时域资源为用于传输所述参考信号的时频资源中的时域资源；
    所述终端设备在所述时频资源上接收来自网络设备的所述参考信号。
  7. 根据权利要求6所述的方法，其特征在于，所述终端设备确定所述第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会，包括：
    所述终端设备确定第一偏置量，所述第一偏置量用于指示所述第一目标寻呼机会在所述第一周期的第m个第一时长上的N个寻呼机会中的位置；
    所述终端设备根据所述第一偏置量确定所述第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会。
  8. 根据权利要求7所述的方法，其特征在于，所述终端设备根据所述第一偏置量确定所述第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会，包括：
    若所述第一目标寻呼机会中包括多个目标寻呼机会，所述终端设备根据所述第一偏置量确定所述第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会中的第一个寻呼机会。
  9. 根据权利要求7所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述终端设备接收来自所述网络设备的N位的比特位图，所述比特位图中的每个比特分别用于指示所述N个寻呼机会中的每个寻呼机会是否关联所述参考信号；
    所述终端设备根据所述第一偏置量确定所述第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会，包括：
    所述终端设备根据所述比特位图和所述第一偏置量确定所述第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会。
  10. 根据权利要求6所述的方法，其特征在于，所述终端设备确定所述第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会，包括：
    所述终端设备根据R、PO_Index和N确定第二参数值，所述第二参数值用于表征所述第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会是否为所述第一目标寻呼机会，其中，N为所述第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会的个数，PO_Index为所述第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会的索引，PO_Index是根据所述第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会所在的帧号或者所述第一周期开始的帧号确定的；R是根据所述第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会所在的超帧号和帧号、或者所述第一周期开 始的帧号和所述第一周期所在的超帧号确定的。
  11. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，所述通信装置应用于周期长度为第一周期长度的多个周期中，所述多个周期包括第一周期和第二周期，所述第一周期和第二周期均包括M个第一时长，所述第一时长上包括N个寻呼机会，所述第一周期内寻呼机会的位置分布与所述第二周期内寻呼机会的位置分布相同，M为正整数，N为大于1的正整数；其中，所述通信装置包括处理模块和收发模块；
    所述处理模块，用于确定所述第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会，其中，所述第一目标寻呼机会在所述第一周期内的相对位置与第二目标寻呼机会在所述第二周期内的相对位置不同，所述第二目标寻呼机会为所述第二周期的第m个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会，m为小于或者等于M的任意正整数；
    所述处理模块，还用于根据所述第一目标寻呼机会确定所述第一周期的第m个第一时长上的时域资源，所述时域资源为用于传输参考信号的时频资源中的时域资源；
    所述收发模块，用于在所述时频资源上向终端设备发送所述参考信号。
  12. 根据权利要求11所述的通信装置，其特征在于，所述处理模块用于确定所述第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会，包括：
    用于确定第一偏置量，所述第一偏置量用于指示所述第一目标寻呼机会在所述第一周期的第m个第一时长上的N个寻呼机会中的位置；根据所述第一偏置量确定所述第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会。
  13. 根据权利要求12所述的通信装置，其特征在于，所述处理模块用于根据所述第一偏置量确定所述第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会，包括：
    用于若所述第一目标寻呼机会中包括多个目标寻呼机会，根据所述第一偏置量确定所述第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会中的第一个寻呼机会。
  14. 根据权利要求12所述的通信装置，其特征在于，所述收发模块，还用于向所述终端设备发送N位的比特位图，所述比特位图中的每个比特分别用于指示所述N个寻呼机会中的每个寻呼机会是否关联所述参考信号；
    所述处理模块用于根据所述第一偏置量确定所述第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会，包括：
    用于根据所述比特位图和所述第一偏置量确定所述第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会。
  15. 根据权利要求11所述的通信装置，其特征在于，所述处理模块用于确定所述第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会，包括：
    用于根据R、PO_Index和N确定第二参数值，所述第二参数值用于表征所述第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会是否为所述第一目标寻呼机会，其中，N为所述第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会的个数，PO_Index为所述第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会的索引，PO_Index是根据所述第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会所在的帧号或者所述第一周期开始的帧号确定的；R是根据所述第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会所在的超帧号和帧号、或者所述第一周期开始的帧号和所述第一周期所在的超帧号确定的。
  16. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，所述通信装置应用于周期长度为第一周期长度 的多个周期中，所述多个周期包括第一周期和第二周期，所述第一周期和第二周期均包括M个第一时长，所述第一时长上包括N个寻呼机会，所述第一周期内寻呼机会的位置分布与所述第二周期内寻呼机会的位置分布相同，M为正整数，N为大于1的正整数；其中，所述通信装置包括处理模块和收发模块；
    所述处理模块，用于确定所述第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会，其中，所述第一目标寻呼机会在所述第一周期内的相对位置与第二目标寻呼机会在所述第二周期内的相对位置不同，所述第二目标寻呼机会为所述第二周期的第m个第一时长中的目标寻呼机会，m为小于或者等于M的任意正整数；
    所述处理模块，还用于根据所述第一目标寻呼机会确定所述第一周期的第m个第一时长上的时域资源，所述时域资源为用于传输参考信号的时频资源中的时域资源；
    所述收发模块，用于在所述时频资源上接收来自网络设备的所述参考信号。
  17. 根据权利要求16所述的通信装置，其特征在于，所述处理模块用于确定所述第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会，包括：
    用于确定第一偏置量，所述第一偏置量用于指示所述第一目标寻呼机会在所述第一周期的第m个第一时长上的N个寻呼机会中的位置；根据所述第一偏置量确定所述第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会。
  18. 根据权利要求17所述的通信装置，其特征在于，所述处理模块用于根据所述第一偏置量确定所述第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会，包括：
    用于若所述第一目标寻呼机会中包括多个目标寻呼机会，根据所述第一偏置量确定所述第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会中的第一个寻呼机会。
  19. 根据权利要求17所述的通信装置，其特征在于，所述收发模块，还用于接收来自所述网络设备的N位的比特位图，所述比特位图中的每个比特分别用于指示所述N个寻呼机会中的每个寻呼机会是否关联所述参考信号；
    所述处理模块，用于根据所述第一偏置量确定所述第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会，包括：
    用于根据所述比特位图和所述第一偏置量确定所述第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会。
  20. 根据权利要求16所述的通信装置，其特征在于，所述处理模块用于确定所述第一周期的第m个第一时长中的第一目标寻呼机会，包括：
    用于根据R、PO_Index和N确定第二参数值，所述第二参数值用于表征所述第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会是否为所述第一目标寻呼机会，其中，N为所述第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会的个数，PO_Index为所述第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会的索引，PO_Index是根据所述第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会所在的帧号或者所述第一周期开始的帧号确定的；R是根据所述第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会所在的超帧号和帧号、或者所述第一周期开始的帧号和所述第一周期所在的超帧号确定的。
  21. 根据权利要求2-4、7-9、12-14、或17-19任一项所述的方法或通信装置，其特征在于，所述第一偏置量是根据第一参数值、所述第一周期长度和所述N确定的；
    其中，所述第一参数值是根据所述第一周期开始的帧号、或所述第一周期所在的 超帧号中的一项或多项确定的；
    或者，所述第一参数值是根据所述第一周期开始的帧号、或所述第一周期所在的超帧号中的一项或多项、以及所述参考信号的周期长度确定的。
  22. 根据权利要求21所述的方法或通信装置，其特征在于，所述第一偏置量、所述第一参数值、所述第一周期长度和所述N满足：
    所述第一偏置量＝(所述第一参数值/所述第一周期长度)mod(所述N)，其中，mod表示取余。
  23. 根据权利要求2-4、7-9、12-14、或17-19任一项所述的方法或通信装置，其特征在于，所述第一偏置量是根据第一参数值和所述N确定的；
    其中，所述第一参数值是根据所述第一周期开始的帧号、或所述第一周期所在的超帧号中的一项或多项、以及所述参考信号的周期长度和所述第一周期长度确定的。
  24. 根据权利要求23所述的方法或通信装置，其特征在于，所述第一偏置量、所述第一参数值、和所述N满足：
    所述第一偏置量＝(所述第一参数值)mod(所述N)，其中，mod表示取余。
  25. 根据权利要求23所述的方法或通信装置，其特征在于，所述第一偏置量是根据第一参数值和所述N确定的，包括：
    所述第一偏置量是根据所述第一参数值、所述N和伪随机序列确定的。
  26. 根据权利要求25所述的方法或通信装置，其特征在于，所述第一偏置量、所述第一参数值、所述伪随机序列和所述N满足：
    所述第一偏置量＝f(伪随机序列)mod(所述N)，其中，mod表示取余，所述伪随机序列为与所述第一参数值相关的伪随机序列，f(伪随机序列)为由所述伪随机序列确定的函数。
  27. 根据权利要求5、10、15或20所述的方法或通信装置，其特征在于，所述第二参数值满足：
    所述第二参数值＝(A1+B1*PO_Index+C1*R)mod N，其中，A1、B1、C1均为整数；mod表示取余。
  28. 根据权利要求5、10、15、20或27所述的方法或通信装置，其特征在于，PO_Index满足：
    PO_Index＝(A+(floor((B+SFN 1)*nB/T+C)+i_s)mod(nB)；其中，A、B、C均为整数；floor表示向下取整；SFN 1表示所述第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会所在的帧号或者所述第一周期开始的帧号；T表示所述第一周期；mod表示取余；nB表示寻呼密度；i_s表示所述第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会所在的子帧号的索引。
  29. 根据权利要求5、10、15、20、27或28所述的方法或通信装置，其特征在于，R满足：
    R＝floor((SFN 1+1024*H-SFN 1)/T)；其中，SFN 1表示所述第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会所在的帧号或者所述第一周期开始的帧号，H-SFN 1表示所述第一周期的第m个第一时长中的寻呼机会所在的超帧号或者所述第一周期所在的超帧号，floor表示向下取整，T表示所述第一周期。
  30. 根据权利要求1-29任一项所述的方法或通信装置，其特征在于，所述第一周期和所述第二周期均为非连续接收周期。
  31. 一种参考信号的发送方法，其特征在于，所述方法包括：
    网络设备向终端设备发送第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示第一资源上是否有第一参考信号；
    若所述第一指示信息指示所述第一资源上没有所述第一参考信号，所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第一资源上是否有第二参考信号。
  32. 一种参考信号的接收方法，其特征在于，所述方法包括：
    终端设备接收来自网络设备的第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示第一资源上是否有第一参考信号；
    若所述第一指示信息指示所述第一资源上没有第一参考信号，所述终端设备接收来自所述网络设备的第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第一资源上是否有第二参考信号。
  33. 一种参考信号的发送方法，其特征在于，所述方法包括：
    网络设备向终端设备发送第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示第一资源上是否有参考信号；
    若所述第一指示信息指示所述第一资源上有所述参考信号，所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第一资源上是否有第一参考信号。
  34. 一种参考信号的接收方法，其特征在于，所述方法包括：
    终端设备接收来自网络设备的第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示第一资源上是否有参考信号；
    若所述第一指示信息指示所述第一资源上有所述参考信号，所述终端设备接收来自所述网络设备的第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第一资源上是否有第一参考信号。
  35. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，所述通信装置包括：处理模块和收发模块；
    所述收发模块，用于向终端设备发送第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示第一资源上是否有第一参考信号；
    所述收发模块，还用于在所述处理模块确定所述第一指示信息指示所述第一资源上没有所述第一参考信号之后，向所述终端设备发送第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第一资源上是否有第二参考信号。
  36. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，所述通信装置包括：处理模块和收发模块；
    所述收发模块，用于接收来自网络设备的第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示第一资源上是否有第一参考信号；
    所述收发模块，还用于若所述处理模块确定所述第一指示信息指示所述第一资源上没有第一参考信号，接收来自所述网络设备的第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第一资源上是否有第二参考信号。
  37. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，所述通信装置包括：处理模块和收发模块；
    所述收发模块，用于向终端设备发送第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示第一资源上是否有参考信号；
    所述收发模块，还用于若所述处理模块确定所述第一指示信息指示所述第一资源上有所述参考信号，向所述终端设备发送第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第一资源上是否有第一参考信号。
  38. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，所述通信装置包括：处理模块和收发模块；
    所述收发模块，用于接收来自网络设备的第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示第一资源上是否有参考信号；
    所述收发模块，还用于若所述处理模块确定所述第一指示信息指示所述第一资源上有所述参考信号，接收来自所述网络设备的第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第一资源上是否有第一参考信号。
PCT/CN2019/109526 2019-02-19 2019-09-30 参考信号接收与发送方法、设备及系统 Ceased WO2020168723A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2021548590A JP7220799B2 (ja) 2019-02-19 2019-09-30 参照信号受信および送信方法、装置およびシステム
CN201980091871.XA CN113455067B (zh) 2019-02-19 2019-09-30 参考信号接收与发送方法、设备及系统
EP19916044.1A EP3920612B1 (en) 2019-02-19 2019-09-30 Reference signal receiving and sending method, device and system
BR112021016401-4A BR112021016401A2 (pt) 2019-02-19 2019-09-30 Método de recepção e envio de sinal de referência, dispositivo e sistema
US17/404,193 US11895618B2 (en) 2019-02-19 2021-08-17 Reference signal receiving and sending method, device, and system

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CNPCT/CN2019/075499 2019-02-19
PCT/CN2019/075499 WO2020168472A1 (zh) 2019-02-19 2019-02-19 参考信号接收与发送方法、设备及系统
PCT/CN2019/085052 WO2020168636A1 (zh) 2019-02-19 2019-04-29 参考信号接收与发送方法、设备及系统
CNPCT/CN2019/085052 2019-04-29

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US17/404,193 Continuation US11895618B2 (en) 2019-02-19 2021-08-17 Reference signal receiving and sending method, device, and system

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2020168723A1 true WO2020168723A1 (zh) 2020-08-27

Family

ID=72143350

Family Applications (3)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2019/075499 Ceased WO2020168472A1 (zh) 2019-02-19 2019-02-19 参考信号接收与发送方法、设备及系统
PCT/CN2019/085052 Ceased WO2020168636A1 (zh) 2019-02-19 2019-04-29 参考信号接收与发送方法、设备及系统
PCT/CN2019/109526 Ceased WO2020168723A1 (zh) 2019-02-19 2019-09-30 参考信号接收与发送方法、设备及系统

Family Applications Before (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2019/075499 Ceased WO2020168472A1 (zh) 2019-02-19 2019-02-19 参考信号接收与发送方法、设备及系统
PCT/CN2019/085052 Ceased WO2020168636A1 (zh) 2019-02-19 2019-04-29 参考信号接收与发送方法、设备及系统

Country Status (6)

Country Link
US (1) US11895618B2 (zh)
EP (1) EP3920612B1 (zh)
JP (1) JP7220799B2 (zh)
CN (1) CN113455067B (zh)
BR (1) BR112021016401A2 (zh)
WO (3) WO2020168472A1 (zh)

Families Citing this family (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2020220354A1 (zh) * 2019-04-30 2020-11-05 华为技术有限公司 一种通信方法及装置
CN114246006B (zh) * 2019-08-15 2024-08-16 瑞典爱立信有限公司 用于确定与窄带参考信号(nrs)相关联的寻呼时机的方法和装置
EP4216474A4 (en) * 2020-09-16 2024-06-05 Beijing Xiaomi Mobile Software Co., Ltd. INFORMATION NOTIFICATION METHOD, INFORMATION RECEIVING METHOD, APPARATUS, DEVICE, AND STORAGE MEDIUM
WO2022141304A1 (zh) * 2020-12-30 2022-07-07 华为技术有限公司 参考信号的指示方法和装置、计算机可读存储介质及计算机程序
US20230008854A1 (en) * 2021-07-09 2023-01-12 Qualcomm Incorporated Discontinuous reception methodology for multimedia
WO2025137928A1 (en) * 2023-12-27 2025-07-03 Nec Corporation Devices and methods of communication

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN104735691A (zh) * 2013-12-20 2015-06-24 北京三星通信技术研究有限公司 信道状态信息汇报的方法及装置
WO2018034762A1 (en) * 2016-08-16 2018-02-22 Qualcomm Incorporated Energy-efficient paging in wireless networks
CN108702721A (zh) * 2018-05-11 2018-10-23 北京小米移动软件有限公司 寻呼同步方法及装置
CN109120388A (zh) * 2017-06-23 2019-01-01 中国移动通信有限公司研究院 参考信号配置、接收方法、基站、终端、计算机可读存储介质

Family Cites Families (17)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101453788B (zh) * 2007-12-03 2011-04-06 华为技术有限公司 确定寻呼时刻的方法
CN102036381B (zh) * 2009-09-24 2015-05-20 中兴通讯股份有限公司 定位业务的子帧的配置方法和装置
US8964672B2 (en) * 2011-11-04 2015-02-24 Blackberry Limited Paging in heterogeneous networks with discontinuous reception
US20130229965A1 (en) * 2012-03-05 2013-09-05 Qualcomm Incorporated Paging during connected mode discontinuous reception (drx) operations
WO2015042780A1 (zh) * 2013-09-24 2015-04-02 华为技术有限公司 一种寻呼消息的接收方法、发送方法及装置
CN106572533B (zh) * 2015-10-10 2020-09-11 中兴通讯股份有限公司 寻呼处理方法及装置
CN109548144B (zh) * 2017-01-05 2021-10-08 中兴通讯股份有限公司 一种寻呼信息的传输方法及装置
CN108401289B (zh) * 2017-02-04 2020-06-02 华为技术有限公司 用于寻呼的方法和装置
US10736077B2 (en) * 2017-05-05 2020-08-04 Qualcomm Incorporated Configuration of remaining system information transmission window
CN109309555B (zh) * 2017-07-27 2022-07-12 夏普株式会社 基站、用户设备和相关方法
KR102388350B1 (ko) * 2017-07-31 2022-04-19 삼성전자주식회사 지시 정보 검출 방법과 장치, 및 전송 중계 방법 및 기기
WO2019028849A1 (en) * 2017-08-11 2019-02-14 Mediatek Singapore Pte. Ltd. METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR SYNCHRONIZATION / FREQUENCY TRACKING TO RECEIVE PAGING
CN109245876B (zh) * 2017-09-27 2019-09-03 华为技术有限公司 一种寻呼的方法、通信定时的方法和装置
EP3799483B1 (en) * 2018-05-21 2022-11-30 Beijing Xiaomi Mobile Software Co., Ltd. Method and device for sending wake-up signal, and paging demodulation method and device
CN111148221B (zh) * 2018-11-02 2022-03-29 华为技术有限公司 一种寻呼方法、终端设备以及网络设备
CN111436103B (zh) * 2019-02-02 2021-12-24 维沃移动通信有限公司 节能模式的切换方法、节能模式的配置方法及通信设备
US11166255B2 (en) * 2019-12-03 2021-11-02 Lg Electronics Inc. Monitoring a paging on an unlicensed band

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN104735691A (zh) * 2013-12-20 2015-06-24 北京三星通信技术研究有限公司 信道状态信息汇报的方法及装置
WO2018034762A1 (en) * 2016-08-16 2018-02-22 Qualcomm Incorporated Energy-efficient paging in wireless networks
CN109120388A (zh) * 2017-06-23 2019-01-01 中国移动通信有限公司研究院 参考信号配置、接收方法、基站、终端、计算机可读存储介质
CN108702721A (zh) * 2018-05-11 2018-10-23 北京小米移动软件有限公司 寻呼同步方法及装置

Non-Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
HUAWEI, HISILICON: "NRS presence on non-anchor carriers for paging", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-1812138, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. RAN WG1, no. Spokane, USA; 20181112 - 20181116, 11 November 2018 (2018-11-11), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France, XP051553979 *
See also references of EP3920612A4

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN113455067A (zh) 2021-09-28
WO2020168636A1 (zh) 2020-08-27
US20210385788A1 (en) 2021-12-09
US11895618B2 (en) 2024-02-06
EP3920612A4 (en) 2022-04-20
EP3920612B1 (en) 2024-09-18
WO2020168472A1 (zh) 2020-08-27
EP3920612A1 (en) 2021-12-08
JP2022523185A (ja) 2022-04-21
BR112021016401A2 (pt) 2021-10-13
CN113455067B (zh) 2022-10-04
JP7220799B2 (ja) 2023-02-10

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US20220394664A1 (en) Paging method and apparatus
US12349062B2 (en) Reference signal sending method, reference signal receiving method, device, and system
JP7220799B2 (ja) 参照信号受信および送信方法、装置およびシステム
US20200107294A1 (en) Signal Transmission Method, Network Device, And Terminal Device
CN113261320B (zh) 通信方法、装置及系统
CN111989959B (zh) 一种信息发送、接收方法及装置
CN112335296A (zh) 用于无线通信的电子设备和方法、计算机可读存储介质
US20220141828A1 (en) Channel quality reporting method, apparatus, and system
US12375234B2 (en) Communication method, device, and system
CN114731729B (zh) 协作传输方法、设备及系统
US20250150969A1 (en) Signal transmission method and communication apparatus
US12294545B2 (en) Method for receiving and sending reference signal, apparatus, and system
US12035341B2 (en) Communication method, apparatus, and system
WO2020088455A1 (zh) 通信方法和通信装置
US20260089630A1 (en) Method and device for wireless communication
CN112020129A (zh) 数据传输方法、装置及系统
US20250106856A1 (en) Method and device for monitoring downlink channel, and readable storage medium
CN121510218A (zh) 无线通信系统中的方法和设备
WO2025232696A1 (zh) 一种通信方法及相关装置
WO2026043401A1 (en) Predefined composite synchronization signal set
CN116367328A (zh) Sl信号处理方法、设备及可读存储介质
CN120034876A (zh) 负载确定方法、装置及设备

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 19916044

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2021548590

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

REG Reference to national code

Ref country code: BR

Ref legal event code: B01A

Ref document number: 112021016401

Country of ref document: BR

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2019916044

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20210902

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 112021016401

Country of ref document: BR

Kind code of ref document: A2

Effective date: 20210819